Mill CNC Controller

Transkript

Mill CNC Controller
H6C-M
Mill CNC Controller
Manual
(Suitable for the controller: H6C-M、H6CL-M、H9C-M、H9CL-M)
Ver:Jan , 2011
HUST Automation Inc.
No. 80 Kon Yei Road, Toufen, Miaoli, Taiwan
Tel: 886-37-623242
Fax: 886-37- 623241
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
MAIN FEATURES OF HUST MILL CNC CONTROLLER
1-1
2
OPERATION
2-1
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.4.1
2.3.4.2
2.3.4.3
2.3.4.4
2.3.5
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
Mode
Basic Operation
Startup Screen
Standby Screen
MPG – TEST (MPG hand-wheel test)
Auto Mode Screen
MDI Mode Screen
Home Mode Screen
Jog Mode Screen
Edit Mode Screen
Program Select Screen
I/O Mode Screen
Tool Compensation Screen
Graph Mode Screen
Servo Response Screen
Programming Overview
Part Programs
Programming Methods
Program Composition
Coordinate System
Coordinate Axis
Coordinate Positioning Control
Work Origin
Machine Origin
Numerical Control Range
Program Editing
Program Selection
New Program Edition
Existing Program Modification
Delete a Program
Entering Decimal Points
Editing Notes
I
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-12
2-14
2-16
2-18
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-24
2-24
2-26
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-33
2-34
2-34
2-35
2-35
2-36
2-38
2-42
2-42
2-43
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
2.4.7
2.4.7.1
2.4.7.2
2.4.7.3
2.4.7.4
3
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.16.1
3.16.2
3.16.3
3.16.4
3.16.5
3.16.6
3.17
3.17.1
Graphical Input
G81~G89
G22~G25
G34~G37
Program Edit by TEACH mode
Programming and Command Codes
Types of Command Codes
One-shot G-code
Modal G-code
Fast Positioning G00
Linear Cutting, G01
CNC and Master/Slave Mode
Arc Cutting, G02, G03
Servo Spindle Positioning Command
Thread Cutting, G17,G18 , G19
Dwell Command, G04
Clear Machine Coordinate, G08
Data Setting, G10
Set the Work Origin Using G10 (Recommended)
Set the Tool Length Compensation Using G10
Set G01 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Using G10
English/Metric Measuring Mode, G20, G21
Return to the First Reference Point, G28
Return to Previous Position from The Reference Point, G29
Return to the Second (2nd) Reference Point, G30
Skip Function, G31
Tool Compensation,G40,G41,G42
Tool radius and radius wear compensation
The Initial Setting of the Tool Radius Compensation
Relationship between the Radius Compensation and
Tool Path
Tool Radius Compensation – Cancellation
Notes on Tool Radius Compensation
Tool length compensation, G43, G44, G49
Work Coordinate System Setting, G54~G59
Machine Coordinate System (Home)
II
2-44
2-45
2-46
2-47
2-48
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-11
3-14
3-14
3-17
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-19
3-21
3-22
3-22
3-23
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-31
3-33
3-34
Table of contents
3.17.2
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.28
3.29
3.30
3.31
3.32
3.33
3.34
3.35
3.36
3.37
3.38
3.39
3.40
3.41
3.42
3.43
3.43.1
3.43.2
3.44
4
4.1
4.2
Work Coordinate System Setting, G54~G59
Mirror-Effect Cutting, G68, G69
Absolute and Incremental Coordinate Settings, G90, G91
Canned Cycle Functions (H4CL-M only), G81~G89, G80
G90 or G91-Absolute or Incremental Coordinate Setting
G94 or G99 – FeedRate,setting
G98 or G99 – Cutting Feed-rate Setting
G80, G81~G89 -- Canned Cycle Commands
G80 Cancellation of Canned Cycle
G81 Drilling Canned Cycle
G82 Drilling Canned Cycle
G83 Deep Drilling Canned Cycle
G84 Taping Cutting Canned Cycle
G85 Boring Canned Cycle
G86 Boring Canned Cycle (Spindle Stop at Hole Bottom)
G89 Boring Canned Cycle with Dwell at Hole Bottom
G22 Linear Groove Milling (the function Absolute G90 only)
G23 Curve Groove Milling(the function Absolute G90 only)
G24 Square Groove Milling(the function Absolute G90 only)
G25 Round Groove Milling(the function Absolute G90 only)
Special Canned Cycle
G34 Circular Drilling Canned Cycle
G35 Angular Linear Drilling Canned Cycle
G36 Arc Drilling Canned Cycle
G37 Grid Drilling Canned Cycle
Auxiliary Function, M-code, S-code
Sub-program
The Structure of Sub-program
Execution of Sub-program
Customized Program Group Command, G65
3-34
3-37
3-38
3-39
3-40
3-40
3-41
3-42
3-42
3-42
3-43
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-45
3-46
3-46
3-47
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-49
3-50
3-50
3-50
3-51
3-51
3-51
3-52
3-52
4-1
MCM Parameter Settings
MCM Parameter Settings
Description of MCM Parameters
III
4-1
4-30
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
5
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.5.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.5.8
5.5.9
5.6
6
5-1
CONNECTIONS
Connecting System Introduction
System Installation
Operating Environment
Notes on the Control Unit Case Design
Thermal Design of Cabinet
H6C-M External Dimensions
Panel (Including the MDI Panel)
Series Cabinet Dimensions and Rear View port
Series Control Unit Case Dimensions (Top View)
Series Cutout Dimensions
Installation of controller
Installation of operator panel
Connecting Diagrams
Explanation of connector
Definition for pin of connector
DA/AD analogy Input / Output
DA/AD signal control
G31 INPUT explanation
Definition & connection for axes port
MPG connection
Spindle control connection
Analogy command connection
Pulses command connection
SIO Input / Output (Connection structure)
SIO Module board
SIO connect board
NPN Output Relay board
AC Power Output (SSR type) Module board
DC Power connect board
AC Power Supply Connection
RS 232 Connector Pin Assignment and Connection
Emergency Stop Circuit
Error Message Explanations
IV
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
6-1
Table of contents
7
Appendix
7-1
A
7-1
7-3
7-4
7-4
Input Planning
Output Planning
M-code and I/O
Other
8
8.1
8.2
Appendix B – zDNC and USB Device Operation
Using USB Device in H6C-M
zDNC Operation
Getting Started
Open the Option Setting Screen
Display Settings
PC TO CNC
CNC TO PC
Attention
8-1
8-1
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-8
9
Appendix C Master Axis Settings and G84 Mode
9-1
10
Appendix D H6C-M and H9C-M
10-1
V
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
VI
1 Main Features of HUST Mill CNC Controller
1
Main Features of HUST Mill CNC Controller
□
H6C-M Controlled Axis: X, Y, Z, A, B and Spindle Encoder Feedback.
H9C-M Controlled Axis: X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V and Spindle Encoder
Feedback.
□
Program Designed by CAD/CAM on PC. Program input and DNC on-line
execution from PC through RS232C interface.
□
Memory Capacity for CNC main board - 500k.
□
USB can be used to increase memory capacity.
□
The LCD display is a 800x600, 16 color screen.
□
Battery Backup for CNC program storage in case of power-off.
□
Backlash error compensation for worn lead screw.
□
Provide 40 sets of tool length offsets.
□
Self-designed MACRO Program.
□
Single block and continuous commands.
□
Optional Skip functions.
□
Optional Stop and Feed hold functions.
□
Simultaneous use of absolute and incremental programmable coordinates.
□
Self-diagnostic and error signaling function.
□
Direct use of “ R”, “ I” and “ J” incremental values for radius in circular
cutting.
□
MPG hand-wheel test and collision free function for cutting products at the
speed controller by MPG.
□
Equipped with 48 standard programmable inputs and 32 outputs.
This operator’s manual includes basic operation, program editing, G/M code,
parameter settings, connections and maintenance (plus warning descriptions)
with examples and explanations for each command instruction.
If there are any problems with application, please fill out a problem sheet
indicating the nature of the problem. Send it by either fax or mail. We will
respond to you as soon as possible.
1-1
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
1-2
2 Operation
2
Operation
2.1
Mode
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
AUTO (GRAPH, MPG-TEST, SERVO Response)
SINGLE
EDIT
PRNO
DNC
TEACH
JOG (x1、x10、x100)
‹
‹
‹
HOME
IO
MCM
Fig 2-1
Fig 2-2
You can use the mode selection keys or auxiliary panel for mode switching.
2-1
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
2.2
Basic Operation
Screen Description
* Startup Screen
After powering the controller, the following startup screen displays:
Fig 2-3
* Standby Screen
After 3 seconds, Into the selected mode,
Fig 2-4
2-2
2 Operation
* MPG – TEST (MPG hand-wheel test)
Turn the Mode to the “MPG – TEST” to enter this mode.
Fig 2-5
When the start key is pressed in the “MPG – TEST” mode, no axis will move
before the hand-wheel is rotated. The axes will stop moving when the hand
wheel stops rotating. This function is very useful for checking the changes of
each block and ensuring the program correctness at the initial stage of program
development.
Switching between the “MPG – TEST” mode and “Auto” mode is possible when
the program is running. When a program section failure is suspected, the mode
can be switched to MPG – TEST to check the changes in the program. It then
switches back to Auto mode when the problem is removed.
Fig 2-6
2-3
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
* Auto Mode Screen
Press the “Auto/ MDI” key or turn the mode to Auto to enter Auto mode. The
following screen displays:
Fig 2-7
Auto mode Press the Page 『
press the Cursor
key will into
』key will into (FIG 2-7-1),
Feed-hold
(FIG 2-7-2)
Fig 2-7-1
Fig 2-7-2
2-4
2 Operation
Functions of the “soft keys” in Auto mode:
1. SINGLE: This function can be selected at any time no matter whether the
program is running or stops.
Whenever the "Start" key is pressed with this function selected, only the next
command line will be executed instead of the entire program.
2. Dry Run: This function can be selected or canceled only when the program
stops running.
When this function is selected, all specified feed-rates (F value) in the
program become invalid and the program runs at the highest speed set in
MCM #221~226.
3. OP_Stop: This function can be selected at any time no matter whether the
program is running or stops.
When this function is selected, the M01 command in the program is used as
stop command. It doesn’t function if the Optional Stop is not selected.
4. OP_Skip: This function can be selected at any time whether the program is
running or not.
When this function is selected, the /1 command in the program will be
skipped (not executed). This command line will be executed if the Optional
Skip is not selected.
5. Re_start: This function needs to be selected before the program runs.
When the "Re_start" function is selected, program operation proceeds with
the execution from the position interrupted.
6. Hand-Wheel Interruption: (This function is available only when the program
is suspended.)
This function is used to move all axes with the hand-wheel when the program
is suspended. Press the Start key to run the program after moving of axes.
2-5
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
COUNT:
The 『COUNT』 will be increment by 1 when the program runs to M02, M03, or
M99. Press the “0” key twice to reset.
Press [0] twice to
clear.
Fig 2-8
RUN Time:
The current RUN time (sec.) is displayed. Resetting is performed automatically
when the controller is restarted after interruption of ending of the program.
* MDI Mode Screen
Press the “Auto/ MDI” key twice or switch the mode to MDI, to enter MDI mode.
The following screen displays:
Fig 2-9
A single command line is executed during MDI mode.
2-6
2 Operation
* HOME Mode Screen
Press the “JOG / Home” key twice or turn the mode to Home, to enter the
HOME mode. The following screen displays:
Fig 2-10
Methods for returning to the HOME:
Select an axis for returning to the HOME with the axis and press the “Start” key
to perform the action of returning to the HOME
When Z-axis needs to return to the HOME before X, Y, A, B-axes, press the
“Z->XYAB” key at the bottom of the screen for 1 second to execute the homing
action of Z-axis. X, Y, A, B-axes return to the origin simultaneously after the
homing action of Z-axis is completed.
[Z] to go home and then the
others will go home
2-7
Fig 2-11
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
* Jog Mode Screen
Press the “JOG / Home” key once or turn the mode to JOG to enter Jog mode.
The following screen displays:
Fig 2-12
The jog mode provides the following functions:
1.
Axial Positioning:
‹ Continuous Movement: Select an axis with the knob and press the JOG +
or JOG- on the auxiliary panel.
JOG
+
RAPID
JOG
-
Fig 2-13
‹ Hand-wheel: Select an axis with the knob and turn the hand wheel (when
an external hand-wheel function is selected, it will be controlled externally).
2.
Manual Switch (Soft_Key):
a. Spindle: CW, CCW, stop.
b. Coolant: Press the key to turn on and press it again to turn off.
When the LED indicator lights up, it indicates that an action is running.
c. Lubricant: Press the key to turn on and press it again to turn off.
The LED illuminates to indicate that an action is running.
2-8
2 Operation
3.
Press the Origin Setting and the following screen displays:
Fig 2-14
(1).Standard work origin setting:
a. Have the tool touch the end face of the work-piece manually or
using the hand-wheel.
b. Press the soft key X Origin, Y Origin, and Z Origin for three
seconds.
c. Write the machine coordinates of this point in work coordinates.
(2).Work-piece center point setting:
a. Have the tool touch the End Face A of the work-piece manually or
using the hand-wheel as described in (1). Press the soft key X
Origin, Y Origin, and Z Origin for 3 seconds and write the machine
coordinates of this point in work coordinates.
b. Then have the tool touch the End Face B of the work-piece
manually or using the hand-wheel.
c. Press the soft key X 1/2 and Y 1/2. The controller sums up the
machine coordinates of the end faces A and B and divides the total
value by 2. Apply the quotient to the work coordinates and this
position is the center point of the work-piece in the work coordinate
system.
End Face A
Center Point
End Face B
Rectangular
Work-piece
Fig 2-14-1
(3). Setting the Center Point of the Working Origin of a Circular Workpiece:
2-9
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
a. Press the function key [Circle Center Coordinate] to enter the
setting screen.
b. Use the hand-wheel to set the working origin following the standard
procedure or manually move the tool to touch any point on the
perimeter of the workpiece and press the Soft key P1 to memorize
the coordinate; touch the 2nd point and press P2 to memorize the
coordinate; and then touch the 3rd point and press P3 to memorize
the coordinate.
c. After the coordinates of the three points are memorized, press the
[Circle Center] key and the system will calculate the center
coordinate and its radius according to the coordinates of the three
points.
d. Press the [Setting] key to memorize the calculated center
coordinate in the current working coordinate system; or the user can
memorize the center coordinate and then manually enter it into the
required coordinate system after return to the working coordinate
system setting page.
e. Return: go back to the working origin setting page.
Fig 2-14-2
2-10
2 Operation
4.
Press the Manual Drilling and the following screen displays:
Simple manual drilling
Fig 2-15
(1).Complete the fields and press the Execute key to start the processing
procedure according to the value entered by the user.
Drilling Depth: The downward drilling depth along the current Z-axis.
Drilling Speed: The speed of drilling a hole (G01).
Each Feed Depth: The depth of each drilling at which the Z-axis
returns to the start point.
Reserved Distance: Quickly feeding to the last drilling depth –
coordinates of the reserved distance.
Current Coordinates: Display the current X, Y, and Z coordinates.
(The user may complete this field, if required.)
Press and hold the “Execute” key (not the Start key) at the bottom of
the screen to execute the drilling action. (Start the spindle manually
before drilling).
(2).Press the soft key "Return" to return to the manual jog screen.
2-11
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
* Edit Mode Screen
Press the “Edit/PRNO” key once or turn the function mode to “Edit” to enter the
Edit mode. The following screen displays:
Fig 2-16
Fig 2-16-1
The program can be edited in this mode. Refer to Section 2.3.2 ~ 2.3.7 for more
information about program editing.
Operations of Soft Keys in the Edit Mode:
1. Single Block Search: Enter the ID number of the corresponding single
block first and then press the [Single Search] to search for the single block.
The cursor will point to the [Target Single Block].
2-12
2 Operation
EX:
→N10 G1 X30.
N20 X50. Y50.
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 X345.Y234.
N60 X860.
N70 X500.Y300.
N80 M02
In the Edit mode,
enter N60 and then
press [Single
Search], the cursor
will point to N60.
N10 G1 X30.
N20 X50. Y50.
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 X345.Y234.
→N60 X860.
N70 X500.Y300.
N80 M02
2. LAST-N: Search for the interrupted single block. When the program is
interrupted during execution, the user can use this function to find
out the last executed single block at which the program was
interrupted.
EX: Assume the last executed single block is the N70 at which the program
was interrupted.
→N10 G1 X30.
N20 X50. Y50.
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 X345.Y234.
N60 X860.
N70 X500.Y300.
N80 M02
In the Edit mode,
press [LAST-N]
and then the
cursor will point to
N70.
N10 G1 X30.
N20 X50. Y50.
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 X345.Y234.
N60 X860.
→N70 X500.Y300.
N80 M02
3. Set and Restart: Move the cursor to the machining command to be
restarted and then press the soft key [Set and Restart]. The
program will be executed from the line before the command
indicated by the cursor to perform the machining operation.
2-13
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
* Program Selector Screen
Press the “Edit/PRNO” key twice or turn the function mode to “PRNO” to enter
the PRNO mode. The following screen displays:
Fig 2-17
Program selection methods:
1 Select a program:
(1) Use the “Cursor
” key or “Page
arrow to the desired program number.
(2) Press the “Enter” or “Select” key.
" key to move the
2 Program comments:
(1) Use the “Cursor
” key or “Page
" key to move the
arrow to the program number for which program comments are entered.
(2) Enter letters or numbers.
(3) Press the "Enter" key.
3 Delete a program:
(1) Use the “Cursor
” key or “Page
" key to move the
arrow to the program number to be deleted.
(2) When you press the “Delete” key, a dialogue pops up to request your
confirmation.
(3) Press the “Y” key to conform and delete the program.
4 Copy a program:
(1) Press the “Copy” key and the following screen displays:
2-14
2 Operation
Fig 2-18
(2).
Use the “Cursor
(3).
(4).
arrow to the program number of the Source program.
Press the “Source” key
Use the “Cursor
” key or “Page
" key to move the
(5).
(6).
” key or “Page
" key to move the
arrow to the program number of the Target program.
Press the “Target” key.
When program numbers of the source and target files are confirmed,
press the “Copy” key to execute the copy action.
2-15
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
* I/O Mode Screen
Press the “I/O/Parameter” once to enter the I/O mode. The following screen
displays:
Fig 2-19
I00-I47 is the INPUT status. (Highlight shows input)
O00-O31 is the OUTPUT status. (Highlight shows output)
Fig 2-20
2-16
2 Operation
IOCSA Status Displays Screen
Fig 2-21
After entering the IOCSA Status Display Screen, the Page keys
can be
used to switch the IOCSA status with 1=ON (Red) and 0=OFF (White).
System Information Screen
Press and hold the “I/O/Parameter” key for 3 seconds to enter the System
Information Screen as shown in the following figure:
Press the [Reset] button to exit.
Fig 2-22
2-17
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
* Tool Compensation Screen
Click the “T.Radius/T.Offset” once to enter the tool length compensation mode.
The following screen appears: ※ (Refer to Section 3.15.6 for more information)
T_Offset
Fig 2-23
Switching between the screens is possible using the soft key in this mode.
Tool-wear compensation screen and tool length compensation screen
2-18
2 Operation
1. Follow the steps below to configure the parameters for tool length
compensation:
a. Use the “Cursor
to be changed.
b. Enter the desired wear value.
c. Press the “Enter” key.
” key to move the cursor to the parameter
Fig 2-24
2. Press the soft key “Wear” on the tool length compensation screen to enter
the tool length compensation mode as shown in Fig 2-12 below: ※ (Refer to
Section 3.15 for more information)
Fig 2-25
2-19
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Follow the steps below to configure the parameters for tool wear
compensation:
a. Use the “Cursor
” key to move the cursor to the parameter
to be changed.
b. Enter the desired compensation value.
c. Press the “Enter” key.
3. Press the “MCM” key to enter the parameter screen as follows:
T_Offset
Fig 2-26
The operation procedure to set the tool compensation is as follows:
a. Use the “Cursor
” key to move the cursor to the parameter
to be changed.
b. Enter the desired compensation value.
c. Press the “Enter” key, the system will subtract the current coordinate of
the axis by the compensation value and then memorize it in the length
compensation setting.
2-20
2 Operation
4. Press the ‘Parameter” key to enter the Parameter Setting Screen as shown
in the following figure:
Fig 2-27
Enter M9998 in the MDI mode and press the Start key. Then the parameter
setting key displays on the tool length compensation screen.
* Note that changing the parameters without professional guidance may
cause serious damage to the machine.
2-21
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
* Graph Mode Screen
Press the “Graph” key to enter the Graph mode. The following screen displays:
Fig 2-28
SERVO
RESPONSE
The “*” in the center of the screen indicates the zero position. It can be moved
to other places with the Cursor key.
The current coordinate system displays at the bottom right corner of the screen.
You can use the four keys, X-Y, Y-Z, X-Z, and X-Y-Z, at the bottom of the screen
to select the coordinate system you need.
The number "123" at the bottom right corner of the screen represents the
current horizontal ratio of the graph. The ratio can be changed using the Page
Up and Page Down keys.
To clear the image, press the "Clear" key.
Note that the program automatically switches to Auto mode after entering graph
mode.
2-22
2 Operation
* Servo Response Screen
In the Trace Mode, press the [Servo Response] key to view the waveform of the
acceleration and deceleration response of the axial command. According to the
acceleration/deceleration profile setting in Parameter 502, it can be
[Exponential], [Linear], or [“S” curve]. The following figure shows an example of
the Linear profile.
SERVO
RESPONSE
Operation:
1. Use the Cursor
2. Use the Cursor
3. Use the Cursor
Fig 2-29
keys to adjust the Voltage Scale to be displayed.
keys to switch the Axis to be displayed.
keys to adjust the Time Interval to be displayed.
2-23
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
2.3
Programming Overview
2.3.1 Part Programs
The movement of a numerical control machine is controlled by the program.
Prior to part machining, the part shape and machining conditions must be
converted to a program. This program is called a part program. A
comprehensive machining plan is required for writing the part program. The
following factors must be taken into account when developing the machining
plan:
1. Determine the machining range requirements and select a suitable
numerical control machine.
2. Determine the work-piece loading method and select appropriate tools and
chucks.
3. Determine the machining sequence and tool path.
4. Determine the machining conditions, such as the spindle speed (S), feed
rate (F), coolant, etc.
A part program is a group of sequential commands formulated according to the
part diagram, machining plan, and command code of the numerical control unit. It
is used to plan the tool path with the assistance of the auxiliary functions of the
machine. The part program can be transmitted to the memory of the control unit
via a PC or keyboard.
2.3.2 Programming Methods
A numerical control unit executes actions exactly in accordance with the
commands of the part program. So, programming is very important to numerical
control machining. A programmer must have the following capabilities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Good capability of reading part diagrams.
Rich experience in machining processes.
Familiar with the functionality, operation procedure and programming
language of the machine.
Basic capability in geometric, trigonometric, and algebraic operations.
Good capability of determination of machining conditions.
Good capability in setting chucks.
2-24
2 Operation
7.
Good capability in determination of part material.
Two programming methods are available for the part program of the numerical
control unit:
□ Manual Programming
□ Automatic Programming
Manual Programming
All processes from drawing of the part diagram, machining design, numerically
controlled program algorithm, programming, to the transmission of the program
to the controller are performed manually.
The coordinates and movement of the tool used in machining operations should
be calculated first during the manual programming process. Calculation will be
easier if the part shape is comprised of straight lines or 90-degree angles. For
curve cutting, however, the calculation is more complicated and geometric and
trigonometric operations are required for accurate curves. After acquiring the
coordinate of the work-piece, create a complete numerically controlled part
program in a specified format using the movement command, movement rate,
and auxiliary functions. Check the program and make sure that there are no
errors before transmitting it to the controller.
Automatic Programming
All processes, from the drawing of the part diagram to the transmission of the
numerically controlled program to the controller are performed with a PC.
For complex part shapes, manually calculating coordinates is time-consuming
and can easily have errors, resulting in nonconforming machined products. To
make use of the high-speed operating capabilities of computers, the
programmer designs a simple language to describe the machine actions and
the shape, size, and cutting sequence of the part, reinforcing the
communication and processing capability of the computer. The input data is
translated into a CNC program using the computer, which will be in turn
transmitted to the CNC controller via RS232C interface. It is called CAD/CAM
system and used by many units using CNC machines to create a program
especially for machining 3-D work-piece.
2-25
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
2.3.3 Program Composition
A complete program contains a group of blocks and a block has a serial number
and several commands. Each command is composed of a command code (letter
A~Z) and some numbers (+.-.0~9). An example of a complete part program
containing 10 blocks is shown in the table below. A complete program is assigned
with a program number, such as O001, for identification.
A complete program:
N10 G00 X0.000 Y0.000 Z0.000
N20 M3 S1000
N30 G01 X10.000 Y10.000 Z10.000 F200
N40 X20.000
N50 Y20.000
N60 Z20.000
N80 G0 X0.000 Y0.000 Z0.000
N90 M5
N100 M2
Blocks are the basic units of a program. A block contains one or more
commands. No space should be inserted between commands when
transmitting a program. A block has the following basic format:
N___G___X(U)___Y(V)___Z(W)___F___S___D(H)___M___
N
: The serial number of the block, which is not essential.
G
: Function command.
X,Y.Z,A,B,C : Coordinate positioning command (absolute movement
command).
U, V, W : Coordinate positioning command (incremental movement
command).
F
: Feed rate.
S
: Spindle speed.
D, H
: Tool number.
M
: Auxiliary functions (machine control code).
2-26
2 Operation
Except for the block serial number (N), the command group of a block can
be classified into four parts:
1.
Function Command: The G-code, for example, is used to instruct the
machine to perform actions, such as linear cutting or arc cutting.
2.
Positioning Command: X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, W commands, for example,
instruct the tool of the machine to stop cutting at a specified position; i.e.
destination or end point of the action.
3.
Feed Rate Command: This command instructs the tool to cut (G-code) at
a specified speed.
4.
Auxiliary Function: The M, S, D, L commands, for example, determine
the start, stop, spindle speed, tool selection, and execution times of the
machine.
However, not every block contains these four commands. Some blocks have
only one command. This will be further discussed in Chapter III.
Except for the block serial number of the block N___, all other components of
the basic block format are commands. A command contains a command code
(letter), a +/- sign, and some numbers.
Basic Command Format (e.g. the positioning command):
X-10.000
X
: Command code
"-"
: +/- sign (+ can be omitted)
10.000 : Destination of tool positioning action (the current position of the
tool is the start point).
The command codes include the function command code, positioning (or
coordinate) command code, feed-rate, command code, and auxiliary function
command code. Each command code has its own definition and the machine
behaves according to the command code given. The command codes of H6C-M
Series and their definitions are described below.
D
F
G
H
:
:
:
:
Tool radius compensation number.
Feed-per-rotation command.
Function code.
Tool length compensation number.
2-27
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
I
J
K
K, L
M
N
O
P
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Q
R
S
U
:
:
:
:
V
:
W
:
X
Y
Z
A
B
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
The X-axis component of the arc radius.
The Y-axis component of the arc radius.
The Z-axis component of the arc radius.
Repetition counters.
Machine control code.
Program serial number.
Program number.
Dwell time; call subprogram code; parameter in canned
cycles.
Parameter in canned cycles.
Arc radius or parameter in canned cycles.
Spindle speed.
H6C : Incremental positioning command on X-axis.
H9C : Absolute positioning command on U-axis.
H6C : Incremental positioning command on Y-axis.
H9C : Absolute positioning command on V-axis.
H6C : Incremental positioning command on Z-axis.
H9C : Absolute positioning command on W-axis.
Absolute positioning command on X-axis.
Absolute positioning command on Y-axis.
Absolute positioning command on Z-axis.
Absolute positioning command on A-axis.
Absolute positioning command on B-axis.
Absolute positioning command on C-axis.
Each block has a specified format and this format must be used during the
programming. The system either does not accept an incorrect format. Major
errors may occur if an incorrectly formatted command is accepted.
Each block has a serial number for identification. Though the serial number is
not essential, it is recommended to use it for easy search. The serial number
contains the letter “N” and some numbers. It is generated either automatically or
by keying in from the keyboard when editing the program. (Refer to Chapter IV).
The numbers should not be repeated and it is not necessary to be arranged in
order. The program runs in order of blocks from top to bottom rather than their
serial numbers. For example:
Ex: N10……(1) program execution order
N30…….(2)
2-28
2 Operation
N20…….(3)
N50…….(4)
N40…….(5)
2.3.4 Coordinate System
Fabrication of a work-piece is accomplished by the cutting motion of the
machine-mounted tool. The tool can move in an arc or straight line. A coordinate
system is used to describe the geometrical positions of the intersecting point
and end point of an arc or line. The cutting action is done by the controlled
change of these geometrical positions (positioning control)
2.3.4.1.
Coordinate Axis
The H6C-M Series uses the well-known 2-D/3-D Cartesian coordinate system.
The 2-D coordinate system of the H6C-M is X-Y, Y-Z, or Z-X, and X-Y is used as
an example in this manual. As shown in the figure below, the intersecting point
of X-Y is the zero point, i.e. X=0 and Y=0.
+Y
P2 (-X,+Y)
P1 (+X,+Y)
X=0,Y=0
+X
P4 (+X,-Y)
P3 (-X,-Y)
Fig 2-30
The 3-D coordinate system is a rectangular coordinate system (right hand rule)
consisting of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis. A right angle is formed with the
thumb, forefinger, and middle finger. The directions to which the thumb,
forefinger, and middle finger point represent the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis
respectively. The intersection point of the axes is the zero point, indicating X=0,
Y=0, Z=0. When you grasp an axis with your right hand, your thumb points to
the positive direction of the axis and the rest four fingers point to the direction of
its normal rotation.
2-29
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
+Y (Forefinger Dir.)
Normal Rot.
+X (Thumb Dir.)
X=0,Y=0,Z=0
Normal Rot.
Normal Rot.
+Z (Middle Finger Dir.)
Fig 2-31 3-D Coordinate System (Horizontal Milling Machine)
+Z
-Y
-X
+X
+Y
-Z
Fig 2-32 3-D Coordinate System (Vertical Milling Machine)
The Z-axis in the 3-D coordinate system should be parallel to the spindle. (The
spindle is the rotating axis and the tool is clamped.) After the Z-axis is set, the
X-axis and Y-axis can be determined using the rectangular coordinate system
(the right hand rule) in Fig. 23.
2.3.4.2.
Coordinate Positioning Control
The coordinates of the H6C Series controller are either absolute or incremental,
depending on the command code of the coordinate axis, i.e.:
X, Y, Z, A, B, C : Absolute coordinate commands.
U, V, W
: Incremental (or decremental) coordinate commands.
2-30
2 Operation
Absolute Coordinate Commands
Tool-positioning coordinates are acquired with reference to the origin (work
origin or program origin) of the work coordinate system. The coordinates are
either positive (+) or negative (-), depending on its position relative to the origin.
Incremental Coordinate Commands
The previous coordinates of the tool are the reference point for calculating the
coordinate value of the next position. The end point of the previous movement
is the start point of the next movement. The incremental coordinates are either
positive (+) or negative (-). The negative sign represents decrement. Facing
toward the direction of the movement, if the tool is heading to the positive (+)
direction, U, V, W represents increment. If it is heading to the negative (-)
direction, U, V, W represents decrement.
X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, W are interchangeable in the program. The commands
used for the absolute and incremental coordinates are described as follows:
Absolute Commands:
N10 G00 X0.000 Y0.000
N20 G90
...
...
N30 G1 X12.000 Y12.000 F300.00
N40 X26.000 Y16.000
N50 X38.000 Y30.000
N60 M2
...
...
...
...
Y
Move to the work origin rapidly
Set the program to absolute
coordinates
P0 to P1
P1 to P2
P2 to P3
Program ends
P3
P2
30
P1
16
12
P0
X
12
26
38
Fig 2-33
2-31
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Incremental Commands:
N10 G00 X0.000 Y0.000
N20 G91
...
...
N30 G1 X12.000 Y12.000 F300.00
N40 X14.000 Y4.000
N50 X12.000 Y14.000
N60 M2
...
...
...
...
Y
Move to the work origin rapidly
Set the program to absolute
coordinates
P0 to P1
P1 to P2
P2 to P3
Program ends
P3
P2
P1
32
16
12
P0
X
12
26
38
Fig 2-34
Note that the “U, V, W” commands will be invalid when the command G91 is used
to set the program coordinates “X, Y, Z” to increment. The incremental command U,
V, W is only valid when the G90 absolute coordinate command is used. The default
of the H6C-M series is in absolute coordinates. In this case, the above-mentioned
program can be re-written as:
N10 G00 X0.000 Y0.000
N20 G1 U12.000 V12.000 F300.00
N30 U14.000 V4.000
N40 U12.000 V14.000
N60 M2
...
...
...
...
...
Move to the work origin rapidly
P0 to P1
P1 to P2
P2 to P3
Program ends
Coordinate Interchange:
N10 G00 X0.000 Y0.000
N30 G1 X12.000 V12.000 F300.00
N40 X26.000 V4.000
N50 X38.000 V14.000
N60 M2
or
...
...
...
...
...
Move to the work origin rapidly
P0 to P1
P1 to P2
P2 to P3
Program ends
2-32
2 Operation
N10 G00 X0.000 Y0.000
N30 G1 U12.000 Y12.000 F300.00
N40 U14.000 Y16.000
N50 U12.000 Y30.000
N60 M2
...
...
...
...
...
Move to the work origin rapidly
P0 to P1
P1 to P2
P2 to P3
Program ends
Simultaneous use of absolute and incremental coordinate systems in a part
program is possible. For the absolute coordinate system, the input error of the
previous position, if any, does not affect the coordinate of the next point. For the
incremental coordinate system, however, all subsequent positioning is affected
if the previous position is incorrect. Therefore, particular attention should be paid
when using incremental coordinates.
There aren’t any rules about when to use the incremental or absolute
coordinate system. It depends on the machining requirements. If each
machining point is positioned relatively to the home position, it is recommended
to use the absolute coordinate system.
For the command of the diagonal (simultaneous positioning on the X and Y-axis)
or arc movement, the coordinate value of each axis acquired with the
trigonometric operation will be rounded off. In this case, particular attention
should be paid when the incremental coordinate system is used, as machining
points may increase, and the more points it has, the more errors will occur.
Basically, whether an absolute or incremental coordinate is used depends on
the programming requirements and the specifications of the machining diagram.
2.3.4.3.
Work Origin
The specifications of the machining diagram are converted to the coordinate
system at the CNC programming stage. Before the conversion, a point on the
work-piece is selected as the zero point of the coordinate system (i.e. work
origin) and the coordinates of other points on the work-piece are calculated
based on this work origin.
The programmer determines the position of the work origin. It can be any point
on the chuck or the table of the milling machine. However, it is recommended to
select an origin that makes reading the work-piece coordinates more easy.
2-33
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
The work origin is also called work zero point or program origin. In this manual,
this zero point is always referred to as the work origin.
2.3.4.4.
Machine Origin
There is a fixed point on the machine bed or bed rail. This point is used as a
reference point for determination of the work coordinates (or work origin) and
calibration of the tool length compensation. This reference point is called
machine origin.
For the H6C-M Series controller, the machine origin is the stop position of the X,
Y, Z, A, B, C when the homing action on each axis is completed. In general, the
machine origin is determined based on the position where the positioning
measurement device and the touch plate of the limit switch are installed on the
machine.
The homing action should be performed after powering on the machine. If
the current position is lost due to power failure, the homing action should
be performed again.
2.3.5 Numerical Control Range
The numerical and functional control range of the H6C-M controller is described
in the following two tables.
Min. setting unit
Max. setting unit
Min. moving distance
Max. moving distance
Min. Time
Max. Time
0.001 mm
8000.000 mm
0.001 mm
8000.000 mm
0.1 sec.
8000.000 sec.
The limits in the above table are applicable to 4/3-formats.
(The max. moving distance reaches up to 80000.00 mm when 5/2-format is
used)
2-34
2 Operation
G code
M code
S code
F code
X, Z, U, W, I, K, R
R (Radius)
G04 Time Setting
Memory capacity
Lead screw
compensation
Max. Response
Speed
G00~G99 (G01=G1)
M00~M999 (M01=M1)
S1~S9999 rpm
0.01 ~ 80000.00 mm/min
0.001~+/-8,000.000 mm
0.001~+/- 4000.000 mm
0~8000.000 seconds
128 K
0~255 pulses (related to tool resolution)
500 KPPS
The numerical control range varies depending on the specifications of the
numerical control unit. Refer to the operator’s manual of the machine for more
information about the machine.
2.4
Program Editing
Program editing operation includes:
1. Program selection,
2. New program editing, and
3. Existing program modification.
2.4.1 Program Selection
The H6C-M controller can store programs numbered O0~O999. You can select
any one of the programs to edit or execute.
Program selection: Double-click the “EDIT/PRNO” key to enter the PRNO mode
and open the file directory page on the LCD (Fig. 2-28). Move the cursor to the
desired program and press the “Input” or “Select” key.
2-35
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Fig 2-35
You can enter the program comments in this mode with a maximum of 12
characters.
Example: To add the comment “ TYPE-201” to O001:
1. Move the cursor to O001
2. Press
T
3. Press
Enter
Y
P
E
2
-
0
1
2.4.2 New Program Editing
1.
After selecting the program number to be edited, press the “EDIT/PRON”
key or turn the knob to EDIT. To edit a new program, the following screen
displays:
Fig 2-36
2-36
2 Operation
The following keys will be used for program editing:
1.
Command key.
2.
Numerical key.
3.
Cursor key – Use the
or
key to move the cursor to the block to
be edited.
Used the
or
key to switch to the pervious or next page of the
program.
NEW
Use the LINE key to create or insert a new block.
Enter a new block in a new program or insert a new block in a program.
Press the NEW key after entering a new block.
4.
5.
0
9
~
LINE
6.
7.
Use the ENTER key to enter data.
After adding a command or changing a command value in an existing
block.
Use the DEL. key to delete the program of a block.
Program Edition Example:
O001
N1 X0.Y0.Z0.
N2 X20.
N3 U480.V-480.
N4 Z-15.
N5 M99
Action and Description:
1.
Make sure the controller is in program-editing mode. Press the
or turn the knob to EDIT.
2.
Enter data:
Enter
First block data:
Press the
NEW
LINE
X
0
y
Enter
key to create a new block, as shown in Fig.2-30:
2-37
EDIT
PRNO
O
key
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Fig 2-37
Then enter:
Y
0
y
Enter
Z
O
y
Enter
The above-mentioned procedure is used to edit the first block data. Enter the
following data for 2nd ~ 5th blocks:
Second block:
X
2
0
y
Third block:
U
4
8
0
Insert
V
-
4
8
0
(Note that the sign
-
Insert
y
Enter
can be entered before the
Fourth block:
Z
-
1
5
Fifth block:
M
9
9
Insert
y
Enter
key is pressed.)
Insert
If the size of a program exceeds one page, use the
the program on each page for its correctness.
or
key to check
2.4.3 Existing Program Modification
We have created PROGRAM 1 in the previous section. We’ll take the
2-38
2 Operation
PROGRAM 1 as an example to explain how to modify a program. Modification
of a program includes the following aspects:
Add (or Change) a Command
Ex: The third block program N3 U480.W-480
Changed to N3 U480. V-480. F300.
Procedure:
1.
Make sure the system is in “EDIT” mode.
2.
Use
3.
Enter a command code and value to be added (changed), e.g. F300.
F
/
3
to move the cursor to block N3.
0
0
Enter
The screen shows as Fig. 2-38.
Fig 2-38
4.
Change U480 by entering U360;
To change an incorrect command, enter the correct command and press
Delete a Command
Ex: The third block program N30 U480. V-480. F300
Changed to N30 U480. V-480.
2-39
Enter
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Procedure:
1.
Make sure the system is in “EDIT” mode.
2.
Use the
/
key to move the cursor to block N3.
3.
Enter a command to be deleted without values, e.g.
(No value is entered behind F). The screen shows as Fig. 2-39:
Fig 2-39
Insert a Block
Ex: Inset the block N31 U20. V-20 between the third block N3 G0 U480. V-480.
and the fourth block N4 Z-15
Procedure:
1.
Make sure the system is in “EDIT” mode.
2.
Use the
3.
Enter
/
key to move the cursor to block N3.
U
2
0
y
Insert
V
-
2
0
y
Enter
2-40
2 Operation
The screen shows as Fig. 2-40
Fig 2-40
Delete a Block
Ex: Delete the block N3 U480 V-480.
Procedure:
1. Make sure the system is in “EDIT” mode.
2. Use the
/
to move to the cursor to block N3.3. Press
The screen shows as Fig. 2-41
Move the cursor to block N31 after block N3 is deleted.
Delete
.
Fig 2-41
* Since N is the line number and has no effect on the execution of the program,
you can decide to enter it or not.
2-41
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
2.4.4 Delete a Program
In PRNO mode, move the cursor to the program to be deleted and press the
Delete key. The following message displays:
Fig 2-42
At this time, press the Y key to delete the program O02. When you press
the N key, no action will be performed.
Note: After the procedure is complete, all program data in the memory will
be erased. Therefore, never perform this action unless required.
2.4.5 Entering Decimal Points
A command value is entered in either integer or decimal format with a maximum
of 7 digits. You cannot enter a decimal point for a command that requires an
integer input, so that no problem will occur when you enter the command value.
You can insert a decimal point at the specified position for a command that
requires a decimal input. The input will be correct after being internally
processed by the control unit. An error may occur when an integer is entered for
a command that needs a decimal input. This will be further explained in the
following paragraphs.
When an integer is entered for a command (such as X, Y, I, J) that requires a
decimal input, the control unit automatically puts a decimal point at the position
specified in the given format. The table below shows the validated values after
the internal processing of the control unit.
2-42
2 Operation
Input
X2
Y250
Z35
U2500
V25
W125.
F300
4/3 Format
X0.002 mm
Y0.0250mm
Z0.035mm
U0.500 mm
V25.0000mm
W125.000mm
F0.3 mm/min
For commands that require a decimal input, the entered integer will be changed
by the control unit, though the value actually entered by the operator is shown
on the screen. The user should pay attention to this. To avoid errors, it is
recommended to enter data with a decimal point. The "0" after the decimal point
can be omitted. The integer codes, such as G, M, N, S, are not affected.
G, M, N, S codes: Variables
X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, W, I, J code
F code
Integer input.
Decimal input.
Integer input.
Suggestion: To avoid confusion, except for G, M, N, and S, all other commands
require a decimal input, the "0" after the decimal point can be omitted.
2.4.6 Editing Notes
Block (Program) Serial number
1.
2.
The letter N of the block serial number can be omitted if necessary.
The number after N is only a symbol. The blocks are sorted in editing
order rather than by value.
For instance, if N35 is inserted behind N30, the order is:
Program 1
N10 G0 X0. Y0.
...... First block
N20 G4 X1.
...... Second block
N30 U480. V-480.
...... Third block
N35 U20. V-20.
...... Fourth block
N40 G4 X1
...... Fifth block
N50 M99
...... Sixth block
2-43
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
3.
If the block serial number N35 is changed to N350, the program execution
order remains the same.
The serial number of a block number is edited in the form of a "string".
That is to say, N10, N010, N0010 represent different block serial numbers
and a complete string must be entered to searching a block serial number.
Block
4
5
6
7
Do not use two G-codes in the same block.
Do not repeat any coordinate code of a command, such as X, Y, Z, U, V, I W,
J and R, in the same block.
If you specify absolute coordinates and incremental coordinates for the
same axis in a block, only the incremental coordinates will be executed.
Example:
G1 X100. U50.----- Only U50 will be executed.
A maximum of 64 characters can be entered in a bock, or the Err-18
message displays.
2.4.7 Graphical Input
Fig 2-43
There are there function keys on the editing screen: “G81~G89”, “G22~G25”,
“G34~G37”, and “ ”.
2-44
2 Operation
2.4.7.1. G81~G89
When “G81~G89” is selected, the following screen displays:
Fig 2-44
Follow the instruction of the diagram and select the required function (G81, G83,
G85, G86, or G89) to open the corresponding screen Example: Select G81 to
open the screen below:
Fig 2-45
Enter the required value in the field. Make sure the input is correct and press
the “Program Insertion” key. The controller automatically generates a new
program based on the value entered in the field. Use the “Program Check” key
to check if the data are correct or the program is generated.
If direct execution of the drilling function is required, press the “Direct Execution”
key for 3 seconds until the program switches to the Auto mode for execution of
this drilling action (not the program being edited). (When execution is complete,
2-45
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
the program returns from the Auto mode to the previous screen.)
A drawing of the drilling action is shown on the right of Fig. 2-38 the user can
enter parameters with reference to this drawing.
Refer to the description of each G command for definition of the values in the
field.
2.4.7.2. G22~G25
When “G22~G25” is selected, the following screen displays:
Fig 2-46
Follow the instructions of the diagram and select the required function. Example:
Select “G25” to open the screen below.
Fig 2-47
Enter the required value in the field. Make sure the input is correct and press
the “Program Insertion” key. The controller automatically generates a new
program based on the value entered in the field. Use the “Program Check” key
2-46
2 Operation
to check if the data are correct or the program is generated.
If direct execution of the grooving function is required, press the “Direct
Execution” key for 3 seconds until the program switches to Auto mode for
execution of this grooving action (not the program being edited). When the
execution is completed, the program returns from Auto mode to the previous
screen.
A drawing of the drilling action is shown on the right of Fig. 2-40. the user can
enter parameters with reference to this drawing.
Refer to the description of each G command for definition of the values in the
field.
2.4.7.3. G34~G37
When “G34~G37” is selected, the following screen displays:
Fig 2-48
Follow the instructions of the diagram and select the required function. Example:
Select “G37” to open the screen below:
2-47
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Fig 2-49
Enter the required value in the field. Make sure the input is correct and press
the “Program Insertion” key. The controller automatically generates a new
program based on the value entered in the field. Use the “Program Check” key
to check if the data are correct or the program is generated.
If direct execution of the grid drilling canned cycle function is required, press the
“Direct Execution” key for 3 seconds until the program switches to Auto mode
for execution of this grid drilling action (not the program being edited). When
execution is complete, the program returns from Auto mode to the previous
screen.
A drawing of the drilling action is shown on the right of Fig. 2-42. The user can
enter parameters with reference to this drawing.
Refer to the description of each G command for definition of the values in the
field.
2.4.7.4.
Program Edit by TEACH mode
Occasionally during program editing, it's difficult to obtain the X or Y coordinate.
One easy way to solve this problem is to use the TEACH function in HUST
H4CL controller. When the system is in TEACH mode, you can use MPG
hand-wheel to move the tool to the desired location.
Then press INPUT key to transfer the coordinates to the program. TEACH
function is similar with EDIT except that you use MPG hand-wheel to find the
2-48
2 Operation
coordinates in TEACH mode. Therefore, all the keys used in EDIT mode as
discussed in last section are also used for editing program in TEACH mode.
When use TEACH function for a large and long work-piece, it's more convenient
to make a hand-carry type TEACH box that contains a MPG
hand-wheel, NEW , DEL. , and INPUT keys.
LINE
(Please refer to Chapter 6 of HUST H6C-M Connecting Manual)
Note that every time the INPUT key is pressed, the current tool coordinate will
be transferred into the program when in TEACH mode. If TEACH function will
be required for part of your program, it’s advisable to do your entire program in
TEACH mode to avoid confusions or mistakes. Followings are steps to edit (or
revise) a program in TEACH mode.
1. Press
EDIT
TEAC
key twice in 0.5 seconds to get in TEACH mode.
2. Enter relevant commands in both
NEW
LINE
and
INPUT
keys.
3. Use MPG hand wheel to move to the desired location and press INPUT
key.
Use CURSOR↑, CURSOR↓ key to select X-axis for input. Use MPG
hand-wheel to move tool to the desired X-axis location. Then press
INPUT key. Repeat this step for Y-axis if desired. Use PAGE↓ to
display the current tool coordinate on LCD screen.
4. Repeat Steps 2~3 to complete the whole program. Finish the program
with M02, M30 or M99 function.
EX: G01 X100.000 ( 100.000 use MPG hand-wheel input coordinate )
M02
1. Enter Teach mode
2. Enter
G
0
1
NEW
LINE
3. Move the tool to the location 100.000 coordinate by using MPG
hand-wheel and press the INPUT key.
2-49
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
4. Enter
M
0
2
NEW
LINE
2-50
3 Programming and Command code
3
Programming and Command Code
3.1
Types of Command Codes
This chapter definitely describes the command codes of H6C-M series and
provides simple examples for each command to explain its applications.
The definition of G-codes in the H6C-M series is similar to other controllers. They
are classified into two groups: (Table 3-1).
3.1.1
One Shot G-code
A One-shot G-code (has no * mark in the table) is valid only in the specified
program block.
Ex: N10 G0 X30.000 Y40.000 ...G0 is Modal G-code
...G4 is a one-shot G-code and only valid in
N20 G4 X2.000
this block.
...No G-code specified; G0 code of the
N30 X20.000 Y50.000
N10 block is valid here.
3.1.2
Modal G-code
A Modal G-code (has a * mark in the table) is valid until it is replaced by another
G-code of the same group.
G00, G01, G02, G03 Same group
G17, G18, G19 Same group
G40, G41, G42 same group. G43, G44, G49 same group.
G54, G59 Same group
G80, G89 Same group G90, G91 Same group
G98, G99 Same group
Ex: N10 G0 X30.000 Y5.000
...G0 is specified.
N20 X50.000 Z10.000
...No G-code specified, G0 remains valid.
N30 Y20.000
...No G-code specified, G0 remains valid.
N30 G1 X30.000 F200
...G1 replaces G0 and becomes valid,
The G-codes of H6C-M controller are listed in Table 3-1. Only one G-code of the
same group can be set for one program block. If more than one G-code is set,
only the last G-code is valid.
3-1
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
G- code
* 00
* 01 #
* 02
* 03
04
08
10
15
* 17
* 18
* 19
* 20
* 21
22
23
24
25
$
$
$
$
28
29
30
31
34 $
35 $
Table 3-1 H6C-M Code Definitions
G-code List
Function
G- code
Function
Fast positioning (fast
* 40 #
Tool radius compensation
feeding)
cancellation
Linear cutting (cutting
* 41
Tool radius compensation
feeding)
setting (left)
Arc cutting, CW
* 42
Tool radius compensation
setting (right)
Arc cutting, CCW
* 43
Tool length compensation
(+) direction
Dwell command (the
* 44
Tool length compensation
interval is determined by X(-) direction
axis)
Clear the machine
* 49
Tool length compensation
coordinate of each axis
cancellation
MCM data input
Servo spindle positioning
% 50 *
Proportion function cancel
Thread cutting, X-Y
% 51 *
Proportion function setting
Thread cutting, Z-X
* 54 #
First work coordinates
Thread cutting, Y-Z
* 55
Second work coordinates
* 56
Third work coordinates
Measurement in INCH
* 57
Fourth work coordinates
mode
Measurement in METRIC
* 58
Fifth work coordinates
mode
* 59
Sixth work coordinates
Linear grooving
Arc grooving
* 68
X-axis mirror-effect cutting
Rectangular grooving
* 69
Y-axis mirror-effect cutting
Circular grooving
* 80 $
Drilling canned cycle
cancellation
Tool moves to the 1st
* 81 $
Drilling canned cycle
reference point
setting
Return to the previous
* 82 $
Drilling canned cycle (dwell
position from the ref. point
at bottom)
Tool moves to the 2nd
* 83 $
Deep hole drilling canned
reference point (a total of
cycle
10 groups)
* 84 $
Tap Cutting canned cycle
%Skip function
* 85 $
Boring canned cycle
* 86 $
Boring canned cycle
(spindle stop at hole
bottom)
Circular drilling canned
* 89 $
Boring canned cycle with
cycle
dwell at hole bottom)
Angular linear drilling
* 90
Absolute coordinate
canned cycle
command
3-2
3 Programming and Command code
36 $
Arc drill canned cycle
* 91
37 $
Grid drilling canned cycle
* 94
* 95 #
˙
˙
˙
˙
3.2
Incremental coordinate
command
Feed-rate specified by
mm/min
Feed-rate specified by
mm/revolution
* -- Modal G-codes
# -- Default settings upon power-on of the controller
$ -- Special functions of H6C-M Series.
% -- Optional functions
Fash Positioning,G00
Format:
G00 X(U)____Y(V)____Z(W)____ A_____ B_____ C_____
X, Y. Z . A . B . C : Positioned end point in absolute coordinate.
U,V. W : Positioned end point in incremental coordinates relative to the
block starting point.
G00 (or G0 ) is used to instruct the tool to move to the specified end point of a
program block at the maximum speed of MCM #221(X-axis)~#225(B-axis) ,. The
start point is the position at which the tool is located before it moves. This
command can control the movement of 1~5 axes simultaneously. The axis that is
not set by the command does not execute any movement.
The path of the tool movement is straight. Where the distance of movement is
different among axes, the controller selects the axis that has the longest movement
distance for fast positioning. The feed-rate of other axes is determined based on
their movement distance and the components of the axis with the longest movement
distance. If the calculated speed of any axis exceeds the MCM setting value, the
controller will re-calculate the feed-rate of other axes based on the feed-rate of the
overrun axis.
Ex: Fig 3-1 S point moves to E point rapidly.
G90
G00 X100.000 Y50.000 Z20.000
+Z
+Y
E
Y50.
Z20
(X0,Y0,Z0)
X100.
S
Fig 3-1 G00 Programming Example
3-3
+X
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
The distances to move are 100.000 (X-axis), 50.000 (Y-axis), and 20.000 (Z-axis).
Since the movement distance of each axis is different, the controller selects the
axis with the longest movement distance for fast positioning at the speed set in
MCM #79. Assume that the speed of MCM #221 is set to 10000 mm/minute, the
movement speed of each axis in the above figure is :
X-axis –
Y-axis –
Z-axis –
3.3
Movement distance 100.000mm. Since X-axis moves farthest, the
controller specifies 10000 of MCM #221 as the feed-rate of the X-axis.
Movement distance 50.000mm. It is divided by the distance of the
longest movement distance 100.000mm and multiplied by the highest
feed-rate 10000 of MCM #222 to acquire 5000 (i.e.
50.000/100.000*10000=5000)
The actual feed-rate of Y-axis is 5000 mm/min
Movement distance 20.000mm. It is divided by the longest movement
distance 100.000mm and multiplied by the highest feed-rate 10000 of
MCM #223 to acquire 2000 (i.e. 20.000/100.000*10000 = 2000)
The actual feed-rate of Z-axis is 2000 mm/min.
Linear Cutting,G01
Format:
G01 X(U)____Y(V)____Z(W)____A____ B____F____
X,Y,Z,A.B.C :
End point in absolute coordinates
U,V,W : End point in incremental coordinates relative to the start point of
the program block.
F
: Cutting feed-rate (F-code can be used in combination with any
G-code)
The F-code can be used in the G00 block without affecting the fast
positioning movement.
G01 (or G1) is used for linear cutting work. It can control the 1~5 axes simultaneously.
The cutting speed is determined by the F-code. The smallest setting value of the Fcode is 0.02 mm/min or 0.2 in/min.
The starting point is the coordinate of the tool when the command is given. The
feed-rate specified after an F-code (Modal code) remains valid until it is replaced
by a new feed-rate.
After the feed-rate (F-code) is determined, the cutting feed-rate of X, Y, Z, A and B
axis is calculated as follows:
(U, V, and W are actual incremental values.)
X feed-rate, Fx =
Y feed-rate, Fy =
U
U2 + V2 + W 2
V
U2 + V2 + W 2
*F
(1)
*F
(2)
3-4
3 Programming and Command code
Z feed-rate, Fz =
W
*F
U2 + V2 + W 2
(3)
Three G01 programming examples are described below. These programs are
different in settings but execute the same linear cutting work.
1.
2.
3.
G90 absolute program-fig3-2
N1 G90
N2 G01 X25.000 Y20.000 Z10.000 F100.00
N3 X60.000 Y50.000 Z40.000
...
P1
...
P2
G91 incremental program(Fig3-2)
N1 G91
N2 G01 X25.000 Y20.000 Z10.000 F100.00
N3 X35.000 Y30.000 Z30.000
... P1
... P2
G90 increment program (Fig3-2)
N1 G90
N2 G01 U25.000 V20.000 W10.000 F100.00
N3 U35.000 V30.000 W30.000
... P1
... P2
P2(X60,Y50,Z40)
40
+Z
+Y
60
P1(X25,Y20,
10
Z10)
20
(X0,Y0,Z0)
3.4
S
50
+X
25
Fig 3-2 G01 Program Example
CNC ans Master/Slave mode
When the part program is running, every block has a feed-rate (F), including the
G0 block. When a feeding command is given in the CNC mode, the motor starts
accelerating to the specified feed-rate. It maintains this speed and decelerates to
zero when the tool approaches to the positioning point. When a feeding command
is given to the next block, the motor repeats the acceleration and deceleration
actions. The speed of the motor is reset to zero between blocks.
Master/Slave mode— In the master/slave mode, an axis is selected as the master
axis and the rest axes are automatically set to slave axes. The motor speed of the
master and all slave axes remains at the feed-rate and is not reset between blocks.
In case that two adjoining blocks have different feed-rates, the motors of the
master and all slave axes perform the acceleration and deceleration actions and
the motor speed is adjusted to the feed-rate of the next block without being reset
to zero. If the feed-rate of the master axis is zero, the controller will select the
feed-fate of the slave axes.
3-5
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM #501 is used to set CNC and master/slave modes: 0 = CNC mode, 1 =
master/slave mode with the X-axis as the master, 2 = master/slave mode with the
Y-axis as the master, 3 = master/slave mode with the Z-axis as the master, 256 =
No-dwell Mode. The CNC and Master/Slave modes are exemplified below.
CNC Mode: MCM #501 is set to 0
In the CNC mode, the speed of the motor decelerates to zero at the end point of
each block. The acceleration/deceleration of the motor is determined by MCM
#502.
MCM parmeter
Parameter #501 = 0
Parameter #501 = 0
Parameter #501 = 0
MCM parameter
G00 Acc/Dec
Parameter #501 = 0
Parameter #501 = 1
Parameter #501 = 2
Exponential
Liinar curve
"S" curve
G01,G02
Acc/DeC
Exponential
Linear curve
"S" curve
Ex 1: Fig 3-3 shows the feed-rate adjustment between blocks when the G01
command is given in CNC mode. Acceleration/deceleration of the motor is
executed in an exponential curve. The coordinates in this example are
absolute coordinates.
N05 G00 X0. Y0. Z0.
N10 G01 X100. F1000.
N20 G01 X200. Y100. Z50. F500.
N30 G01 X300. F250.
N35 G01 X350. F100.
Explanation:
N10 -- X-axis feed-rate F1000; Y-axis and Z-axis 0
feed-rate
N20 -- Same X and Y increment (100) with the same F500 feed-rate;
Z increment = 50 with F250 feed-rate
N30 -- X feed-rate F250; Y and Z feed-rate 0
N35 -- X feed-rate F100; Y and Z feed-rate 0
3-6
3 Programming and Command code
Feed-fate
F value
1500
N10
N35
N30
N20
1000
500
X travel
Feed-fate
100
1000
F value
N10
200
N20
300
400
N35
N30
500
Y travel
Feed-fate
1
1000
F value
N10
2
N20
3
N35
N30
500
Z travel
1
2
3
Fig 3-3 G01 CNC Mode with G01 exponential curve Acc/Dcc
Ex.2 and Ex.3 show how to calculate X and Y feed-rate in CNC mode using
formulae (1) and (2). In the examples, assuming that the highest feed-rate
set in G00 MCM #221~224 of G00 is:
TRX=2000 mm/min (X-axis), TRY=1000 mm/min (Y-axis)
EX2:G1 U100.0 V50.0 F1500
U.V composite vector = (1002 + 502)1/2 = 111.8, so
X feed-rate, Fx = (100/111.8) * 1500 = 1341.6
Y-feed-rate, Fy = (50/111.8) * 1500 = 670.8
Both axes are within the G00 parameter and, thus, valid for feeding.
EX3:G1 X100.0 Y200.0 F2000
X.Y composite vector = (1002 + 2002)1/2 = 223.6, so
X-feed-rate, Fx = 2000 * (100/223.6) = 894.4
Y-feed rate, Fy = 2000 * (200/223.6) = 1788.9
Since Fy > TRY(1000),the feed-rate is limited to:
Fx = (894.4/1788.9) * 1000 = 500,
Fy = (1788.9/1788.9) * 1000 = 1000
3-7
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Master/Slave Mode: MCM #93 is not set to 0
If MCM #501 is set to 1 with the X-axis as the master and the other axes as slaves,
the speed between blocks is not reset to 0 but adjusted to the feed-rate of the next
block. The specified rate of a single block(F) is the feed-rate of the master axis.
The controller adjusts the rate of the slave axes based on the rate of the master
axis and MCM parameters. The example below demonstrates this relationship,
assuming that the feed-rate does not exceed the G00 value. The
acceleration/deceleration type of the motor is determined by MCM #502.
MCM parmeter
MCM parameter
G00 Acc/Dec
Parameter #501 = 0
Parameter #501 = 0
Parameter #501 = 0
Parameter #501 = 0
Parameter #501 = 1
Parameter #501 = 2
Exponential
Liinar curve
"S" curve
G01,G02
Acc/DeC
Exponential
Linear curve
"S" curve
EX1: N10 G01 X100. F1000
N20 X200. Y100. Z50. F500
N30 X300. F250
X-master axis, Y, Z-slave axes. The feed-rate of each block depends on the master
axis, The feed-rate of each slave axis (Y, Z) adjusts according to the incremental
ratio of X/Y, X/Z. The motor accelerates or decelerates linearly. The
acceleration/deceleration status between blocks is shown in Fig 3-4.
3-8
3 Programming and Command code
Feed-rate
F value
1500
N10
1000
500
X-master
Feed-rate
100
1000
F value
N10
200
N20
300
400
N30
500
Y-slave
1
Feed-rate
N30
N20
1000
F value
N10
2
N20
3
N30
500
Z-slave
1
2
3
Fig 3-4 Master/Slave Mode-linear Acc/Dec
If the motor accelerates or decelerates in “S” curve, the acceleration/deceleration
status between blocks is shown in Fig 3-4A:
F value
Feed-rate
1500
N10
1000
500
X-master
Feed-rate
100
1000
F value
N10
200
N20
300
400
N30
500
Y-slave
1
Feed-rate
N30
N20
1000
F value
N10
2
N20
3
N30
500
Z-slave
1
2
3
Fig 3-4A Master/ slave mode-S curve
Ex2: As shown in Fig 3-5, X is the master while Y and Z are the slaves. The feed-rate of
3-9
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
the master axis (X) in each block doesn’t change, but the feed-rate of the slave axes (Y,
Z) changes along with the incremental slope ratio.
N10 G01 X100. Y50. Z0. F1000
N20 X200. Y75. Z50.
N30 X300. Y175. Z100.
In Example 2, the feed-rate of Y-slave changes along with the incremental slope
rate of X, Y and is not reset to zero. Since both increments of the Z-axis are 50,
the feed-rate remains the same. Note that there is a small interval between blocks
during acceleration/deceleration. (Fig. 3-5 )
F value
Feed-rate
1500
N10
1000
500
X-master
200
100
Feed-rate
F value
N10
N20
300
400
N30
1000
500
Y-slave
1
Feed-rate
N30
N20
1000
F value
N10
2
N20
3
N30
500
Z-slave
1
2
3
Fig 3-5 Mater/Slave mode – Master Speed unchanged
The examples below show how to calculate the feed-rate of the master and slave
axes (assuming MCM 221(TRX) = 2000, MCM 222(TRY) = 4000 mm/min). The
relationship between the feed-rate and the max. feed-rate setting (MCM #221 –
225) is taken into consideration during the calculation.
EX3:G0 U100.0 V50.0 (X-axis is the master; MCM #93 is set to 1)
Master feed-rate
Slave feed-rate
Fx = 2000
Fy = (50/100) * 2000.00 = 1000
Fy < TRY (4000),
So, the feed-rate is determined by the TRX value of MCM#221 (X-axis).
3 - 10
3 Programming and Command code
EX4:G0 U100.0 V300.0 (X-axis as Master,MCM#501 = 1)
Master feed-rate
Slave feed-rate
Fx = 2000
Fy = (300/100) * 2000 = 6000
Fy > TRY (4000),thus the speed is limited to:
Master feed-rate
Fx = (4000/6000) * 2000 = 1333.33
Slave feed-rate
Fy = 4000
The feed-rate is determined by the TRY value of MCM#222 (Y-axis).
3.5
Arc Cutting,G02,G03
G02、G03 Arc Cutting
Arc
Radius
Center
G17 G02(G03) X_Y_R_F_ (G17 P256 for X A Surface)
G18 G02(G03)X_Z_R_F_ (G18 P256 for A Z Surface)
G19 G02(G03) Y_Z_R_F_ (G19 P256 for A Y Surface)
G17 G02(G03) X_Y_I_J_F_ (G17 P256 for X A Surface)
G18 G02(G03)X_Z_I_K_F_ (G18 P256 for A Z Surface)
G19 G02(G03) Y_Z_J_K_F_ (G19 P256 for A Y Surface)
Format:
G17
<----- power-on default
G02 (or G03) X____
Y____
I____ J____
G17 P256
G02 (orG03)
X____
A____
I____ J____
G18
G02 (orG03)
X____
Z____
I____ K____
G18 P256
G02 (orG03)
A____
Z____
I____ K____
G19
G02 (orG03)
Y____
Z____
J____ K____
G19 P256
G02 (orG03)
Y____
A____
J____ K____
F____
(R can replace I,J)
(1)
F____
(R can replace I,J)
F____
(R can replace I,K)
(2)
F____
(R can replace I,K)
F____
(R can replace J,K)
(3)
F____
The three command groups control arc cutting on the X-Y (1), X-Z (2), Y-Z (3)
plane. The dimension is controlled by G17, G18, and G19, and G17 is the default
power-on dimension. When executing arc cutting in the X-Y dimension, G17 can
3 - 11
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
be omitted. The function of G17, G18, and G19 will be described in the next
sections. The format of these command groups is a special thread cutting (refer to
the next sections) format. Arc cutting is then executed when the linear axis does
not move during the thread cutting. Definitions of other commands are described
below:
X(U),Y(V),Z(W):
The end point coordinates of arc cutting. The start point is the coordinates of the
tool when G02 or G03 execute.
I, J and K are the increment or decrement from the start point of the arc to the
center of the circle. If the coordinates from the start point to the center of the circle
are incremental, the value is positive. Otherwise, it is negative. The definition of
this increment/decrement is the same as the incremental commands U, V, and W.
All these commands can be replaced by the R command.
F: The feed-rate for arc cutting is determined by F-value. The minimum value is
1mm/min
The path and the direction of the tool are determined by G02, G03 and
G17~19(Fig 3-6).
G02:clockwise (cw)
G03:counter - clockwise (ccw)
Y
X
Z
G02
G02
G03
Y
C
G03
G03
X
G17
X
E point
S point
Center
G02
S
J
I
Center
X
A
C
Z
G18
Z
E point
S
S point
I
K
Z
A
E point
S point
Center
C
Y
G19
S
K
J
Y
A
G02
G02
G03
G03
G17 P256 X
G18 P256
G02
G03
Z
G19 P256
Y
Fig 3-6 Arc cutting
If the angle of an arc is between –1°~1° or 179°~181°, I, J, K cannot be replaced
by R. Fig 3-7 is the example showing the replacement of the I, J, K value with the
radius R-value.
3 - 12
3 Programming and Command code
Y
X
R
E
End
i t
Y
S
Start
i t
X
Fig 3-7 Arc Cutting Indicated by the Radius R Value
As shown in Fig. 3-8, R-value is either positive (+) or negative (-) during the arc
cutting. R-value ranges from –4000. mm to +4000.mm.
1. R values must be positive when an arc less than 180° is cut
2. R values must be negative when an arc greater than 180° is cut .
R2
E
R = -(met.)
R1
S
Y
End Point
R = +(pos.)
Start
Point
X
Fig 3-8 Arc cutting (+/- R)
Programming Example: The following four commands are different in settings but
execute the same arc cutting work.
Start point X=50.000, Y=15.000,
End point X=30.000, Y=25.000,
Radius R=25.000, or I=0.000, J=25.000。
1.
2.
3.
4.
G02 X30.000 Y25.000 J25.000 F200.
G02 U-20.000 V10.000 J25.000 F200.
G02 X30.000 Y25.000 R25.000 F200.
G02 U-20.000 V10.000 R25.000 F200.
Y
30
R = 25
E
10
25
S
15
50
X
3 - 13
Fig 3-9
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
When cutting a full circle, only the I, J, K values, rather than the R-value, can be
used.
EX: G90
G00 X40.000 Y0.000
G03 X40.000 Y0.000 I50. F100.
Y
S (40,0)
E
X
(90,0)
Fig 3-10 Cutting a full cirde
Please note the followings when executing an arc cutting:
1. The F value (i.e. the feed-rate) of G02, G03 is the tangential cutting speed. This
speed is subject to the radius of the arc and the F value of the program
because H6C-M system uses a fixed 1µm chord height error. (Chord Height
Error is the maximum distance between the arc and chord)
2. When the calculated tangential cutting speed of the arc is greater than the F
value of the program, the F-value is used as the tangential cutting speed.
Otherwise, the calculated value prevails.
3. The maximum tangential cutting speed is estimated with the following formula:
Fc = 85 * R * 1000 mm/min
Where R= Arc radius in mm.
3.6
Servo spindle positioning command,G15
Format:
G15 R____
R
: Servo spindle position
Description:
1. This G-code is only applicable to the servo spindle.
2. Ranging 0.000°~359.999°
EX:
G15 R90.000 < ------- to position the master axis at 90 deg.
3.7
Thread Cutting,G17,G18,G19
This command is set as an independent block before the arc cutting command. It
executes an arc cutting on a plane specified by G17, G18, G19 and perform a
linear cutting on a third axis along the path same as the path of a constantdiameter spring. The dimension of the arc cutting is determined by G17, G18, G19
3 - 14
3 Programming and Command code
and the size of the arc are determined by G02, G03 plus the end coordinates of
the linear cutting. The tool radius compensation function is only available for the
specified cutting plans. Details are described below
+Z
+Z
-X
+Y
+X
-Y
-Z
Fig 3-11 X Y Z axes 3D Diagram
G02、G03 Arc(thread)
thread
G17 G02(G03) X_Y_R_Z_F_ (G17 P256 for X A Z Thread)
G18 G02(G03)X_Z_R_Y_F_ (G18 P256 for A Z Y Thread)
G19 G02(G03)Y_Z_R_X_F_ (G19 P256 for A Z X Thread)
G17 G02(G03) X_Y_I_J_Z_F_ (G17 P256 for X A Z Thread)
G18 G02(G03)X_Z_I_K_Y_F_ (G18 P256 for A Z Y Thread)
G19 G02(G03)Y_Z_J_K_X_F_ (G19 P256 for A Z X Thread)
Radius
Center
G17, X-Y Arc Cutting Plane
As shown in Fig 3-12, if you look down at the machine from the above (along the
Z-axis toward the negative direction), you have the X-Y arc cutting plane with Zaxis as the linear axis. Clockwise is G02 and counter-clockwise is G03.
Y
A
G17
G17 P256
G02
G02
G03
G03
X
X
3 - 15
Fig 3-12
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Format:
N1 G17
N2 G02 (or G03) X____
N1 G17 P256
N2 G02 (or G03) X____
Y____ I____ J____
Z____ F____
A____ I____ J____
Z____ F____
G18, Z-X Arc Cutting Plane
If you look at the machine from the back (along the Y-axis toward the negative
direction), you have a Z-X arc cutting plane with Y-axis as the linear axis.
Clockwise is G02 and counter-clockwise is G03.
X
A
G18
G18 P256
G02
G02
G03
G03
Z
Format:
N1 G18
N2 G02 (or G03) Z____
N1 G18 P256
N2 G02 (or G03) Z____
Z
X____ K____ I____
Y____ F____
A____ K____ I____
Y____ F____
Fig 3-13
G19, Y-Z Arc Cutting Plane
If you look at the machine from the right side (along the X-axis toward the negative
direction), you have Y-Z arc cutting plane with X-axis as the linear axis. Clockwise
is G02 and counter-clockwise is G03.
Z
Z
G19
G19 P256
G02
G02
G03
G03
Y
Y
Format:
N1 G19
N2 G02 (or G03)
N1 G19 P256
N2 G02 (or G03)
Y____ Z____ J____ K____ X____ F____
Y____ A____ J____ K____ X____ F____
EX: X-Y arc cutting plane with Z-axis as the linear axis
N1 G17
N2 G03 X80.000 Y30.000 R30.000 Z40.000 F100
3 - 16
Fig 3-14
3 Programming and Command code
EX: A axis Parallel Y axis, X-A arc cutting plane with Z-axis as the linear axis
(Fig 3-15-1)。
N1 G17 P256
N2 G03 X80.000 A30.000 R30.000 Z40.000 F100
Z
END
Y
40
30
R = 30
X
50
START
30
Fig 3-15
Z
Y
A
END
40
30
R = 30
X
50
3.8
START
30
Fig 3-15-1
Dwell Command,G04
Format:
G04 X_____
G04 P_____
X:
P:
Dwell time in seconds (the X here indicates time rather than coordinates).
Dwell time in 1/1000 seconds.
To meet machining requirements, the axial movement may need to hold for a
while when the execution of a program block is completed before the command
for the next block is executed. This command can be used for this purpose.
The minimum dwell time is 0.01 second. It can be set up to 8000.0 seconds.
Ex.: N1 G1 X10.000 Y10.000 F100.
N2 G4 X2.000...Hold 2 seconds,
N3 G0 X0.000 Y0.000
3 - 17
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
3.9
Clear Machine Coordinates,G08
Format:
G08
... Clear machine coordinates for all axes, X, Y, Z
or G08 X____Y____
... Clear the machine coordinates of X and Y axes
or G08 Z___
... Clear the machine coordinates of Z-axis.
or G08 X___ Y___ A__ ... Clear the machine coordinates of X, Y, A axes.
or any combination of X, Y, Z, A.
X, Y, Z values in the format are meaningless. They only indicate the machine
coordinates of the axis to be cleared. If G08 is set to an independent block, the X,
Y, and Z machine coordinates are cleared. If X (or Y or Z) command is given, only
the machine coordinates of that axis will be cleared regardless of its value.
3.10
Data Setting,G10
Table 3-2 HUST HUST H6C-M G10 Command Code List
G10 Command Code List
Set the work origin on the G54~G59
G10 X** Y** Z** A** work coordinates system
G10 X** Y** Z** P** Set the tool length compensation
G10 P510 L38400
G10 P510 L57600
G10 P510 L1152200
G10 P600 L01
G10 P600 L02
G10 P600 L03
G10 P600 L05
G10 P801 B__
G10 P1000
G10 P2000
G10 P2001
G10 P2002
G10 P2100
Set the baud rate of RS232 interface
on the controller to 38400
Set the baud rate of RS232 interface
on the controller to 57600
Set the baud rate of RS232 interface
on the controller to 115200
Burn the downloaded part program
into FLASHROM
Burn
the
downloaded
MCM
parameters into FLASHROM
Burn the downloaded ladder program
into FLASHROM
Burn the downloaded system data into
FLASHROM
Set G01 Accel./Decel. time,
Load
MCM
parameters
from
FLASHROM
Clear the current program of the
controller
Clear all programs in the memory of
the controller
Clear all variables #1 ~ #9999 to zero
Load
the
part
program
from
FLASHROM to memory.
3 - 18
3 Programming and Command code
3.10.1
Set the Work Origin Using G10 (Recommended),G10
Set the work origin on the G54~G59 work coordinate system using G10 command.
The user may use the MDI key on the HUST H6C-M CNC controller or execute the
function through build-in PLC by customization.
Format:
G10 X____Y____Z____A____. Select an axis or all three axes.
Steps for setting the work origin (G54~G59) using G10:
1. Return to Home manually.
2. Enter JOG mode.
3. Move the tool to the desired position where the work origin is to be set.
4. Enter the MDI mode, input G54, and press CYCST.
5A. If the coordinates of the tool in Step 3 is the desired position for the work
origin, do the following:
Press
G10 Input,
X0. Input,
Y0. Input,
Z0. Input,
Press the CYCST key to finish the setting.
5B. If the coordinates of the tool in Step 3 is at some distance (say X=20, Y=100,
Z=15) away from the desired work origin, do the following:
Press
G10 Input,
X20. Input,
Y100. Input.
Z15. Input.
Press the CYCST key to finish the setting.
The following precautions should be observed when using G10 to set the work
origin.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not add P__ to the G10 block, otherwise, it becomes a tool length
(movement) compensation command.
The same procedure is applicable to the G55~G59 coordinate system,
except that G54 is replaced by G55~G59 in Step 4. If no coordinates from
G54 to G59 are specified in step 4, the work origin data will be entered into
the currently valid work coordinate system.
The G10 command can also be applied in the program.
When G54~G59 is selected by G10, the machine position data of the origin
will be entered into MCM #1~#120.
3.10.2
Set the Tool Length Compensation Using G10
Format :
1.
2.
3.
G10 X____ Y____ Z____ P1XX
G10 U____ V____ W____ P1XX
G10 I____ J____ K____ P1XX
3 - 19
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
P1XX
X/Y/Z
U/V/W
I/J/K
:XX=01 ~ 40,1~40 represents the tool group number.
: Setting the tool length compensation data to the corresponding X, Y,
Z of MCM #1431~#1620.
: Setting the tool wear compensation data to the corresponding U, V,
W of the MCM #1621~#1900.
: Adding the tool wear compensation data to the corresponding I, J, K
of the MCM #1621~#1900.
Cont
※ Only can use for the H6C-M . Can't use for the H9C-M.
R -Tool
radius
Tool length
Tool length
Tool length
compensation compensation compensation compensation
X -axis
Y -axis
Z -axis
1
VAR1342
VAR1543
VAR1344
VAR1341
2
VAR1349
VAR1350
VAR1351
VAR1348
3
VAR1356
VAR1357
VAR1358
VAR1359
4
VAR1363
VAR1364
VAR1365
VAR1362
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
39
VAR1608
VAR1609
VAR1610
VAR1607
40
VAR1615
VAR1616
VAR1617
VAR15614
X -axis
Y -axis
Z -axis
1
VAR1622
VAR1623
VAR1624
VAR1621
2
VAR1629
VAR1630
VAR1631
VAR1628
3
VAR15636
VAR1637
VAR1638
VAR1635
4
VAR1643
VAR1644
VAR1645
VAR1642
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
39
VAR1888
VAR1889
VAR1890
VAR1887
40
VAR1895
VAR1896
VAR1897
VAR1894
P –tool group
number
P –tool group
number
R -Tool
radius wear
Tool wear
Tool wear
Tool wear
compensation
compensation compensation compensation
Ex 1: Execute command G10 X0.02 Y0.03 P101Æset the length compensation
value for the first tool group.
>> MCM#1342 = 0.02, A MCM#1343 = 0.03
Ex 2: Assume: The original MCM#1349~1351 settings are X=0.02, AY=0.03,
3 - 20
3 Programming and Command code
AZ=1.25
Execute G10 U0.01 V0.02 W1.72 P102 Æ Set the tool wear compensation
value for the second tool group.
>> MCM#1349 = 0.01, MCM#1350 =0.02, MCM#1351 =1.72
Ex 3: Assume: The original MCM#1349~91350 settings are X=0.02, AY=0.03,
AZ=1.25
Execute G10 I0.01 J0.02 K1.72 P102 Æ Add the tool wear compensation
value to the second tool group.
>> MCM#9205 = 0.02+0.01 = 0.03
MCM#9206 = 0.03+0.05 = 0.05
MCM#9207 = 1.25+1.72 = +2.97
3.10.3
Set G01 Acceleratino/Deceleration time Using G10
The acceleration/deceleration time is stored in MCM #505. This setting can be
adjusted using one of the following 3 methods.
1. Change the setting directly in the MCM EDIT mode.
2. Execute G10 P801 B___ in the MDI mode
3. Change the setting by executing the work program in AUTO mode.
Note: 1.The “RESET” key must be pressed before the new setting is valid.
2. Press 【RESET】.Settings will return to mcm.
Format :
G10 P801 B____
MCM #505
-- Set the G01 acceleration/deceleration time (msec) of
Ex1: Change the G01 acceleration/deceleration time in the MDI mode.
Step 1: Double-click AUTO to enter the MDI mode
Step 2: Execute the command G10 P800 L100
G-1–0
INPUT
P-8-0–1
INPUT
B-1-0–0
INPUT
Step 3: Click CYCST
Step 4: Finish
※ This command is not correct the MCM#505 data, it just temporary
executed the register values of system that you setting, after RESET
or PROWER ON/OFF that system will run the values of MCM#505
when auto-run.
Ex2: Adjust G01 acceleration/deceleration time based on the travel distance
in the AUTO mode,
A/D time = 100 milliseconds if 200.000 ≧ #1
A/D time = 50 milliseconds if 100.000 < #1 ≦ 200.000
3 - 21
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
A/D time = 30 milliseconds if #1 ≦ 100.00
Step 1: Edit the work program 0001
O001
N001 G65 L85 P005 A#1 B100
N002 G10 P801 B30
N003 M02
N005 G65 L85 P008 A#1 B200
N006 G10 P801 B50
N007 M02
N008 G10 P801 B100
N010 M02
Step 2: Enter AUTO mode and execute O001
※ it just temporary executed the register values of system that you
setting, after RESET or PROWER ON/OFF that system will run the
values of MCM#505 when auto-run.
3.11
Imperial/Metric Measuring Modes,G20,G21
Format:
3.12
G20 -G21 --
System measurements use Imperial units.
System measurements use Metric units.
Return to the First Reference Point,G28
Format:
G28
or G28 X____Y____Z____
The first reference point coordinates are set based on the X, Y, Z, A ,Bsettings in MCM
#94~97. The X, Y, Z, A, B values in this format are meaningless. They only indicate
which axis is to return to the reference point. Therefore, regardless of whether G28 is an
independent block or contains X, Y, Z, A, B commands simultaneously, the tools return
to the reference point based on the X, Y, Z, A, B settings in MCM #121~125.
One to three axis coordinate commands can be specified after G28, and the tool
returns to the reference point of the corresponding axis set in the MCM #121-125
accordingly no matter what the value of the command is. The axis, which is not
specified via the command, does not execute any motion. The examples of axial
coordinate commands are shown as follows. Users can set the axes when
required.
G28
G28 X____
Three axes return simultaneously.
One axis returns.
G28 X____Y_____
Two axes return simultaneously.
Note that prior to executing the G28 command, the tool compensation command
must be canceled.
3 - 22
3 Programming and Command code
Ex: G40
G28 X10.
3.13
Tool compensation is canceled (it can not co-exist with G28
in the same block)
Tool returns to the 1st reference point on the X-axis, while
the Y and Z axes do not move.
Return to Previous Position from Reference Point,G29
Format:
G29 X _____ Y_____ Z _____ A_____ B _____
The X, Y, Z, A, B values in this format are meaningless. They only indicate the set of
axes to return to the previous position from the reference point. When the tool returns to
the position before G28 is executed, use the G29 command. This command cannot be
used separately. It must be executed following the G28 or G30 command.
Ex: N1 X60. Y0. Z30. ...Tool moves to the position X60, Y0, Z30.
N2 G28
N3 G29
...Tool returns from X60, Y0, Z30 to the 1st reference
point.
...Tool returns from the reference point to X60, Y0,
Z30
Like the G28 command, one to three axis coordinate commands can be specified
after G29, and the tool returns to the position before G28 is executed regardless
of the command value. The axis, which is not specified via the command, will not
execute any motion. Examples of axial coordinate commands are shown as
follows. Users can set the axes when required.
G29
...Three axes return simultaneously.
G29 X____
...One axis returns.
G29 X____Y____ ...Two axes return.
nd
Return to the Second (2 ) Reference Point,G30
3.14
Format:
G30 X____Y____Z____
Execution of this command is same as G28, but the reference point is set in MCM
#141~145.
3.15
Skip Function,G31
Format:
3 - 23
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
G31 X(U)_____ Y(V)_____ Z(W)_____ A_____ B_____ P__
X、Y、Z、A、B
U、V、W
: Predicted end point in absolute coordinates.
: Predicted end point in incremental coordinates relative
to the starting point.
P : set Skip input sensor。(P1=I01)
To ensure valid skip function G31, it must be used in combination with an I/O
signal. G31 functions same as G01 until the skip function is established' i.e. G31
executes linear cutting in the X, Y, Z, B coordinates. Once an I/O signal is
detected during cutting, the G31 skip function establishes and the block G31 skips
from the current operation to the next block.
When G31 is performing linear cutting, the feed-rate is determined by the currently
effective F-value (G00 or G01). G31 is a one-shot G-code and only valid in the
specified block.
EX:
N40 G40
N50 G31 U100.000 F100.P1
N60 G01 V25.000
N70 X90. Y30.
(X90., Y30.)
Y
Signal
received
25
X
100.
Fig 3-16 G31 skip function
In Fig 3-16, the dotted line represents the original path without the Skip function
and the solid line is the actual tool path when the Skip function signal is received.
Note that G31 cannot be used in the tool radius compensation state. G40 must be
executed to cancel the tool radius compensation before G31 can be used. The
Skip function is invalid during program dry run, feed-rate adjustment or auto
acceleration/deceleration.
3.16
Tool Compensation
The tool compensations of HUST H6C-M CNC have three types The data of tool
compensation are store in the tool length compensation and tool radius wear
compensation, and can store 40 tool compensation data. These data can be
called by G41, G42, G43, G44 commands. Use G40, G49 to cancel the
3 - 24
3 Programming and Command code
1.
2.
3.
Tool radius wear compensation
To compensate the error in x or y-axis resulting from tool radius wear after
use. This compensation is usually used in combination with the tool radius
compensation. The compensation data are stored in the length wear radius
compensation.
Tool length radius compensation
To compensate the error in the tool axis (Z-axis) resulting from differences in
tool lengths.
The compensation data are stored in the tool length radius compensation.
Tool measure compensation
Set the zero point of work position and the compensation's data will storage in
MCM (Tool-Offset)
3.16.1
Tool radius and radius wear compensation ,G40,G41,G42
Format:
G41 D___ X___ Y___
Tool radius compensation - Left
G42 D___ X___ Y___
Tool radius compensation - Right
G40
Tool radius compensation - cancel
D
: Tool number of tool radius and radius wear compensation, no.1~40
X, Y : Insert the coordinates of tool radius compensation.
Description
Where the tool-tip is used to cut along the profile of the work-piece during the
execution of the part program, an over-cutting of the radius will occur on each
processing path. With the tool radius compensation function, a tool radius value
can be offset based on the actual travel of the tool and the specified path of the
command to ensure that the processing result conform to the specifications of the
drawing. Therefore, correct product size can be ensured by writing the work
program based on the specifications of the drawing and the compensation
function of the system. The tool radius does not need to be taken into account for
the program.
The tool size of a milling machine varies significantly from 1mm to 50mm, and the
tool radius compensation G41, G42 can be used to ensure that the tool cuts along
the profile of the design plan.
Whether G41 or G42 is used depends on the relative position between the tool
direction and the tool-tip. To the direction of the arrow in Fig. 3-17, G42 is used
when the central point of the tool radius is located at the right side of the tool path
(radius offset to the right). G41 is used when the central point radius is located at
the left side of the tool path (radius offset to the left). G41 and G42 are Model Gcodes and can only be cancelled using G40.
3 - 25
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Center
G41 (Left Side of the
Path Direction)
r
workpiece
r
Tool Path Dir.
G42 (Right Side of the
Path Direction)
Fig 3-17 G41 and G42 Applications
Execution of Tool Radius Wear Compensation
Tool radius wear compensation is executed in the same way as the tool radius
compensation is. When the G41/G42 command is calling the tool number for
radius compensation using the N-code, the HUST controller simultaneously
selects the tool radius length and radius wear compensation values for the called
toll number and compensation the program.
Ex:
The D3 tool compensation value is
Radius compensation=2.000 mm, radius wear compensation=-0.010mm
Tool radius compensation=2.000-0.010=1.990mm
Please note that the radius wear compensation value is input with a (-) sign. The
radius compensation and radius wear compensation are only valid on the X, Y
plane, not on the Z-axis.
3.16.2
The lnitial Setting of the Tool Radius Compensation
When G41, G42 are executed, the tool will make linear motion to the X, Y
coordinates specified in the G41, G42 blocks at G01 speed (or the X, Y, Z JOG
speed of MCM#201~#205,). When reaching the specified X, Y coordinates, the
tool-tip will shift at a distance equivalent to the tool radius. The start setting of the
G41, G42 commands are only available in the G00 or G01 linear cutting model.
The system will send an error message if it is executed in the G02, or G03 arc
cutting mode. A simple description of the tool start setting function is given below:
1.
Tool radius compensation is executed when the tool travels from A to B.
Insertion of the radius compensation is complete at B.
N1 G01 F200
N2 G41(G42) D______ X______ Y______
N3 X______
3 - 26
3 Programming and Command code
G41
A
B
Program
path
G42
N2
N3
Fig 3-18 Radius compensation-1
2.
Radius compensation is complete at the start point (B) of the arc cutting.
N1 G01 F200.00
N2 G41(G42) N______ X______ Y______
N3 G02 X______ Y______ J______
G41
A
B
G42
Program path
N2
N3
Fig 3-19 Radius compensation-2
3.16.3
Relationship between Radius Compensation and Tool path
G41, G42 are Modal G-code command, so when the insertion of the G41, G42 in
the tool path is complete and before they are cancelled by G40, the tool-tip do a
vector offset to the amount of the tool radius value “r” along the program path.
Calculation of the path is executed automatically for the tool-tip path. When the
direction of the program path changes, the path of the tool-tip also changes and
special attention must be paid to the corner of the changed path. Different corners
are described as follows:
1
Inside corner (θ≦180°)
A small part of the work-piece can’t be cut from the inside corner (Fig 3-20, P
Point).
G41
G42
A
P
B
C
Program
Path
Fig 3-20
3 - 27
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
2
Outside corner (θ>180°)
The tool-tip moves in an arc motion (Fig. 3-21, P point) along the inside
corner to create a new path.
G01
Program path
P
Fig 3-21
If the angle is convex as shown in Fig 3-22, the corner cut is correct while the
correctness of cutting on the inside corner depends on the distance from the
opening C. If the distance is less than the tool diameter, no cutting is
possible. If it is greater than the tool diameter, the tool cuts toward the inside
corner, part of the work-piece cannot be cut in the sharp inside corner.
B
A
P
G01
Program
Fig 3-22
3.
Compensation Direction Change
HUST H6C-M does not accept the direct change of compensation direction
from G41 to G42 or from G42 to G41. Where changing of the direction is
required, the compensation must be cancelled using G40 before the direction
can be changed.
4.
Tool Radius Change
Like the direction change, HUST H6C-M does not accept the direct change
from one tool number to another for radius compensation. Where changing
of the tool number is required, the compensation must be cancelled using
G40 before tool number can be changed.
3.16.4
Tool Radius compensation-Cancellation
Once G41 or G42 is executed successfully, G40 command must be used to
cancel the tool radius compensation. The movement during the cancellation of the
radius compensation can only be executed in the G00 or G01 mode. G40 is not
directly available for G02, G03 blocks and the cancellation can be executed only
after the arc cutting is executed successfully. Below are some examples of the
cancellation of tool radius compensation
1.
N20 G41(G42) D___ ..........
3 - 28
3 Programming and Command code
...
...
N31 G01 X_____ F______
N32 G40 X_____ Y______
B
G41
A
Program Path
G42
N31
2.
N32 G40
Fig 3-23
N10 G41(G42) D___ .............
...
...
N15 G02 X____ Y____ I____ J____ F____
N20 G01
N25 G40 X____ Y____
B
Program Path
N3
G41
A
G42
N25 G40
Fig 3-24
3.16.5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Notes on Tool Raduis Compensation
When cutting around an inside corner, the arc radius of the inside corner
must be equal to or greater than the tool radius (r). Otherwise an alarm will
generate an alarm signal. The arc cutting around an outside corner is not
subject to this regulation.
G41, G42 commands are not applicable to canned cycles (G80~G89). They
must be cancelled using G40 before a canned cycle can be executed.
Where an arc cutting command exists during the tool radius compensation
(G41,42), the writing method of the radius value “R” is applicable.
Where multiple axes are controlled simultaneously, the tool radius
compensation of the HUST H6C-M is only valid on the X, Y plane not on the
Z- axis.
The tool radius compensation function is not available for MDI operation.
When cutting a stepwise work-piece with a step value smaller than the tool
radius, over-cutting many occur as shown in Figure 3-25.
3 - 29
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Fig 3-25 Over-Cutting (Shaded area)
Y
50
X
C
D
40
N
40
B
40
E
K
L
J
P O M
30
100
50
A
I
G
H
F
50
30
S
30
40
80
40
Fig 3-26 Programming examples
Programming Examples of Tool Radius Compensation:
N1 G91
N2 G01 Z-2.500 F150.
N3 G17 F300.
N4 G41 D10 Y30.000
...
...
...
...
N5 Y100.000
N6 X30.000 Y40.000
N7 G02 X100.000 I50.000
N8 G01 X30.000 Y-40.000
N9 Y-100.000
N10 X-40.000
N11 G03 X-80.000 R50.000
N12 G01 X-70.000
N14 Z2.500
N15 G40
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Incremental coordinates setting
Z-axis cutting by 2.5mm
X-Y cutting plane setting
Point A, initial setting of tool radius
compensation
Linear cutting from A~B
Linear cutting from B~C
Half-circle cutting from C~D
Linear cutting from D~E
Linear cutting from E~F
Linear cutting from F~G
Arc cutting from G~H
Linear cutting from H~I
Z-axis rising by 2.5mm
Compensation cancelled, ready for
3 - 30
3 Programming and Command code
N16 M01
N17 G0 X130. Y90. F200.
N18 G01 Z-2.500 F150.
N19 G42 Y-40.000 F300.
...
...
...
...
N20 X-60.000
N21 Y30.000
N22 G02 X80.000 I40.000
N23 G01 Y-30.000
N24 X-60.000
N25 Z2.500
N26 G40 X-60.00 Y-80.00
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
N27 M02
...
3.16.6
direction change
Program suspension.
Positioning to N
Z-axis cutting by 2.5mm
Linear cutting from N~O Compensation
direction change
Linear cutting from O~J
Linear cutting from J~K
Arc cutting from K~L
Linear cutting from L~M
Linear cutting from M~P
Z-axis rising by 2.5mm
Tool compensation cancelled; tool
returning to S point.
Program end.
Tool length compensation ,G43,G44,G49
Tool length compensation is available for the position of Z-axis to correct the error
of the tool length. The length compensation data up to 40 sets are stored in the
tool length compensation. Refer to 3.3.9 for entering the length compensation data
using G10.
Format:
G43(G44) Z_____ H_____
Length compensation setting
or G43(G44) H_____
Length compensation setting
G49
Length compensation cancellation
Z : Initial compensation coordinates
H : Tool number for which the length compensation is executed.
Explanation: Different tools are used for processing of work-pieces on a milling
machine or machining center. Since the length is different among
tools, the distance from the tool-tip to the work-piece varies to a
significant extent. When the tool is changed during the execution of
the program, the difference in the length of the tools before and after
the change will cause an error in Z-axis. The purpose of the tool
length compensation (G43/G44) is to correct the error of the tool
length along the Z-axis.
Length Compensation Setting:
Method 1: Manually move a tool downward from the machine origin of the Z-axis
until it touches the surface of the work-piece. Measure the distance of
the movement and enter the tool length compensation value for each
tool number. Set the tool number required for compensation within the
H value of the command format.
Method 2: Choose a tool via the operation interface of the controller and calibrate
its length in the G54 work coordinate system. This tool will be used as a
reference for determination of the length difference and compensation
value of other tools.
3 - 31
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
When G43 is executed, the controller selects the specified compensation value
and adds it directly to the Z-axis.
When G44 is executed, the controller selects the specified compensation value
and adds it to the Z-axis for compensation after changing direction.
Compensation direction is defined based on the direction of the Z-axis. A positive
compensation means that the tool moves positively along the Z-axis after
compensation. A negative compensation means that the tool moves negatively
along the Z-axis after compensation. The relationship between the compensation
direction and the positive/negative value of the length compensation under the
G43/G44 command is described as follows:
G43
G44
MCM, positive
value
Positive
compensation
Negative
compensation
MCM, negative
value
Negative
compensation
Positive
compensation
EX1: N1 G00 Z0.000
N2 G0 X1.000 Y2.000
N3 G43 Z-20.000 H10 (Length compensation-3.000)
N4 G01 Z-30.000 F200
N5 G49 Z0.000
N3 Block
N4 Block
-20
-30
-23
-33
(Aft.
Compensation)
(Aft.
Compensation)
Fig 3-27
EX2: N1 G00 X-2.000 Y-2.000
N2 G44 Z-30.000 H1 (Length compensation 4,000)
N3 G01 Z-40.000
N4 G49 Z0.000
3 - 32
3 Programming and Command code
N3 Block
N2 Block
-30
-40
-34
(Aft.
Compensation)
-44
(Aft.
Compensation)
Fig 3-28
EX3: N0 G91
N1 G00 X120.000 Y80.000
N2 G43 Z-32.000 H01
N3 G01 Z-21.000 F100.
N4 G04 X2.000
N5 G00 Z21.000
N6 X30.000 Y-50.000
N7 G01 Z-41.000
N8 G00 Z41.000
N9 X50.000 Y30.000
N10 G01 Z-25.000
N11 G04 X2.000
N12 G00 Z57.000
N13 G49 X-200.000 Y-60.000
N14 M02
Y
X
20
30
Start
Point
30
30
120
50
Fig 3-29
3.17
Work Coordinate System Setting,G54~G59
There are two coordinate systems for CNC machine tools. This section describes
how to use these coordinate systems.
1.
2.
Machine Coordinate System (Home)
Work Coordinate System
3 - 33
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Work Coordinate System (G54~G59)
(Recommended)
3.17.1
--Set by To in MCM parameters
Machine Coordinate System(Home)
The origin of the machine coordinate system is fixed in the machine. When you
press HOME from the control panel, the tool or machine table returns to the home
limit switch, and detects the encoder GRID signal. When it locates the GRID, the
tool stops. This location is the HOME position or Machine origin. The Machine
origin is the calculation basis of all work and reference point coordinates. Its
position is normally determined by the position of the travel-measuring rule on the
machine table and the position of the over-travel limit switches (OTLS). Before any
cutting, be sure to execute HOME to determine the position of the machine origin.
Machine
Origin
X0.
Y0.
Z0.
-X
-Y
-Z
Fig 3-30 Machine Origin
Another origin may be required for cutting convenience. This origin is slightly
shifted from the machine origin and, thus, is called HOME SHIFT. The shift
amount is configured in MCM #183~186. When you execute HOME, the tool
returns to the HOME position but the machine coordinate shows the shift value of
MCM #381-385. If the shift value of MCM #183~186 is set to zero (0), the HOME
SHIFT is the HOME position.
The methods to return to the HOME position are:
1.
Manually return to the HOME position.
2.
Use G28 or G30 to home the tools when the reference coordinates in MCM
is set to zero for the X, Y, and Z axes.
3.17.2
Work Coordinate System Setting ,G54~G59
H6C-M series provides 6 sets of work origins. The coordinate system comprising
these work origins is called Work Coordinate System. The 6 sets of work origins
are located relative to the position of the machine origin. Their coordinates are
called machine coordinates and stored in MCM #1~36. Coordinate data can be
entered via:
1.
2.
G10 command in the MDI mode
Direct modification in MCM mode
3 - 34
3 Programming and Command code
3.
Manual jog mode
The application of these work origins in the program is executed by the G54~G59
command codes. Depending on processing requirements and programming, the
user can select up to six sets of work origins to work with. The most advantage of
this work coordinate system is to simplify the coordinate operation of the part
program. See the following examples:
G54
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
represents the work coordinate system using MCM #1~6.
represents the work coordinate system using MCM #21~26
represents the work coordinate system using MCM #41~46
represents the work coordinate system using MCM #61~66
represents the work coordinate system using MCM #81~86
represents the work coordinate system using MCM #101~106.
Fig 3-32 shows the association of the G54~G59 work coordinate system with the 6
settings in the first item of MCM parameters. These coordinate parameters are
determined depending on the machine origin. The G54-G59 work origin parameter
settings are described as follows. (The XY drawing is used for illustration.)
G54 work coordinate system using MCM #1~6 with a setting of X-70,000, Y10,000
G55 work coordinate system using MCM #21~26 with a setting of X-80,000, Y30,000
G56 work coordinate system using MCM #41~46 with a setting of X-80,000, Y50,000
G57 work coordinate system using MCM #61~66 with a setting of X-70,000, Y50,000
G58 work coordinate system using MCM #81~86 with a setting of X-40,000, Y60,000
G59 work coordinate system using MCM #101~106 with a setting of X-20,000, Y40,000
Machine Origin
-90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10
G54
-10
-20
G55
-30
G59
G56
G57
-40
-50
-60
G58
-70
Fig 3-31 G54~G59 Work Coordinate System
Note that the program coordinates are changed when the work coordinate system
is selected. The changed coordinates are determined based on the selected work
3 - 35
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
coordinate system. When the action of cutting a circle or semi-circle is added to
the above program, the application of G54 and G55 can be illustrated as follows.
(Fig. 3-32)
Machine Origin
-90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10
R7
G54
-10
-20
G55
-30
G59
G56
G57
-40
-50
-60
G58
-70
Fig. 3-32 G54~G59 Applications
Ex:
Application of G54 and G55
N1 G0
N2 G54 X0. Y0.
N3 G2 I-7.0 F200.0
N4 G0
N5 G55 X0. Y0.
N6 G1 V10.0 F300.
N7 G3 V-20.0 R10.0 F300.
N8 G1 V10.0 F300.
N9 G28
N10 M2
1.
2.
3.
... Feed-rate set to fast move mode
... Set to program coordinates X0, Y0
(machine coordinates X-70.,Y-10.)
... Cut a circle in CW with R=7.0
... Feed-rate set to fast move mode
... Move to coordinates X0, Y0 of the
second work-piece (Machine coordinates
X-80.,Y-30.)
... Y-axis feeding (incremental command)
travels to +10.0
... Cut a semi-circle in CCW with R=10.0
... Y-axis feeding (incremental command)
travels to +10.0
... If the first reference point = 0, the
program backs to the machine origin.
... Program end
Power-on default is the G54 work coordinate system.
The work coordinate system is selected by executing G54~G59. If the X, Y,
Z coordinates after executing the command are zero, the tool moves to the
origin of the work coordinate system. If the X, Y, Z coordinates after
executing the command are not zero, the tool moves the position
corresponding to the X, Y, Z coordinates of the work coordinate system.
After executing G54~59, the machine coordinates of the work origin
changes along with the setting of new coordinates.
3 - 36
3 Programming and Command code
3.18
Mirror Effect Cutting,G68,G69
Format:
G68
G69
-- X-axis mirror-effect cutting, with Y-axis as the mirror
-- Y-axis mirror-effect cutting, with X-axis as the mirror
Mirror-effect cutting uses a subprogram (referring to the last section of this chapter)
to design a cutting pattern, and then executes G68 and G69 to accomplish the
mirror-effect cutting, as shown in Fig 3-33.
G 68 and G69 are used as a single program block in application. The sign of the
X-coordinates behind the G68 block is inverted (+ changes to -, - changes to +) by
executing G68 while the Y-coordinates are not affected. The sign of the Ycoordinates behind the G69 block is inverted by executing G69 while the Xcoordinates are not affected. Therefore, all you need to do to cut the pattern of Fig
3-34 is to write a subprogram for pattern 1, then execute G68 and G69 for cutting
patterns 2, 3, and 4. The program is written as follows:
M98 P___
G68
M98 P___
G69
M98 P___
G68
M98 P___
G69
M02
-- Cut pattern 1 (P___ subprogram code)
-- Invert the sign of X-coordinates behind G68 block
-- Cut pattern 2 (P___ subprogram code)
-- Invert the sign of Y-coordinates behind G69 block
-- Cut pattern 3 (P___ subprogram code)
-- Invert the sign of X-coordinates behind G68 block
-- Cut pattern 4 (P___ subprogram code)
-- Invert the sign of Y-coordinates behind G69 block.
Y
2
1
0
X
4
3
Fig 3-33 Mirror-effect Cutting
Note that G68 and G69 are modal G-codes.
Whenever G68 or G69 is executed: +X --> -X or +Y-->-Y
When G68 or G69 is executed next time: -X --> +X, or -Y-->+Y
Thus, if only patterns 1 and 2 need to be cut, G68 must be executed again to
restore the sign of X-coordinates, as described below:
3 - 37
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
M98 P___
G68
M98 P___
G68
M02
-- Cut pattern 1 (P___ subprogram code)
-- Invert the sign of X-coordinates behind G68 block
-- Cut pattern 2 (P___ subprogram code)
-- Invert the sign of X-coordinates behind G68 block
The RESET key can also cancel mirror-effect cutting. During mirror-effect cutting,
the "X-MIRROR" or "Y- MIRROR " is shown at the top of the CRT screen. The
display disappears when the mirror-effect cutting is canceled.
3.19
Absolute and lncremental Coordinate Settings,G90,G91
The absolute and incremental coordinate can be set via the following two
approaches:
1.
2.
Mode
-- Use G90 and G91 commends to specify a mode.
Incremental bit-code -- Use U.V.W commands to specify an incremental
bit-code. (Refer to Chapter II)
Mode specification format:
G90
Absolute coordinates setting
G91
Incremental coordinates setting
The absolute coordinates system is the default power-on of the H6C-M Series.
Use G90 and G91 to set the absolute or incremental coordinates in the program.
The incremental bit-code U,V,W are only valid in the G90 status. They are invalid
in the G91 status. X, Y, Z stand for incremental coordinates in the G91 status.
Ex 1: Setting absolute coordinates (Fig. 3-35)
N1 G90
N2 G1 X20.000 Y15.000
....P0 to P1
N3 X35.000 Y25.000
....P1 to P2
N4 X60.000 Y30.000
....P2 to P3
Ex 2: Setting incremental coordinates (Fig 3-35)
N1 G91
N2 G1 X20.000 Y15.000
....P0 to P1
N3 X15.000 Y10.000
....P1 to P2
N4 X25.000 Y5.000
....P2 to P3
Y
60
5
35
10
30
25
P3
P2
P1
15
X
20
15
25
Fig 3-34 G90,G91 Example
3 - 38
3 Programming and Command code
3.20
Canned cycle Functions,G81~G89,G80 (H6C-M only)
These G-code commands are for the H6C-M milling machine only, and NOT for
other HUST CNC controllers.
H6C-M provides a number of canned cycle cutting functions for processing.
They form a command group and are executed using a specified G-code.
The H6C-M series provides several canned cycle functions to simplify
program design. The cutting sequence controlled by the canned cycle
command group of H6C-M is illustrated in Fig. 3-35 below.
1
S
2
Route 5, 6 same as route 2,3
but reversed. These routs are
separated for easy explanation.
6
R Point (Pull-out
Reference Point)
3
5
Z Point (Hole
Bottom)
G00 Rate
G01 Rate
Fig 3-35 Canned Cycle Cutting Sequence
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fast positioning to the start (S) point on X-Y plane.
Fast positioning to the reference point for drilling start (R) along Zaxis.
Hole drilling to at the bottom (Z) along the Z-axis.
Mechanical action at the hole bottom – tool waits or spindle rotation
reverses.
Drill bit retracted to R-point. The moving speed depends on the
command specified.
Move back to the start point S at G00 feed-rate.
When applying the canned cycle function, M03 is used for normal spindle rotation,
M04 is used for reverse spindle rotation, and M05 is used for spindle stop.
Basic Format For Canned Cycle Functions:
G90 or G91
G98
G81~G89 X____Y____Z____P____Q____R____F____K____
G80 or G00 or G01
Explanation
X, Y
Z
P
: Specify absolute or incremental coordinates for the hole.
: Specify absolute or incremental depth or coordinates for the hole.
: Dwell at the hole bottom. Unit: ms; i.e. 1000 stands for one second.
3 - 39
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Q
R
F
K
: G83 amount of feed for each cut, in µm.
: Specify the absolute or incremental coordinates of R-point. R is
the reference point of feeding/retraction.
: Feed-rate setting.
: Processing repetition setting.
During the drilling operation, parameters such as specified drilling mode (such as
G81, G82, and so on), feeding/retraction reference point, and hole depth or
coordinates (Z) are mode codes. They will not change before other command
codes of the same group are set up. The single block command of each basic
format with respect to the canned cycle function is described in detailed below.
3.21
G90 or G91 – Absolute or lncremental Coordinates Setting
These commands were described in the previous section. In the canned cycle
program, R and Z are coordinates relative to the zero point of Z-axis in the
absolute coordinates system, while Z is an incremental coordinate relative to Rpoint in the incremental coordinates system. Though the R and Z coordinates
remain unchanged in the program, their displacement coordinates are different
(Fig. 3-36) when executing different commands (G90/G91).
G90 Absolute
Coordinate
Start Point
G91 Incremental
Coordinate
Start Point
S Point
Z=0
R
R
R
Point
Z Point (Hole
Bottom)
3.22
R Point
Z
Z
G00 Rate
G01 Rate
Z Point (Hole
Bottom)
Fig 3-36
G94 or G95 – Feedrate setting
G94: Feed per minute (mm/min)
G95: Feed per revolution of master axis (mm/rev)
FeedRate of H6C-M miller, F, is defined by G94 and G95, where G94 is for start
up. Conversion between the two is:
Fm = Fr * S
Fm : Feed-rate per minute, mm/min
Fr
: Feed-rate per revolution, um/rev
3 - 40
3 Programming and Command code
3.23
G98 or G99 – Cutting Feed-rate Setting
G98
G99
: Feed-rate per minute, mm/min
: Feed-rate per revolution, mm/rev
G98 Return to Initial Start point
G99 Return to R Pt.
Start point
Start point
S pt.
R
R pt.
R pt.
R
Z
Z Point (hole bottom)
Z
Z point (hole bottom)
Fig 3-37
Example:
M3 S1000
G00 X10.Y10.Z10.
;Master Axis forward revolution
;Set to initial point
M5 S0
;G99 reset
; G81 1st point in drill cycle (back to R)
; 2nd point (back to R)
rd
; 3 point (back to R)
th
;4 point (back to initial point)
; end of drill cycle
;Master axis stopped
M30
;end of program
G99
G81 X10. Y10.Z-30.R0.Q10.F500
X20.Y20.
X30.
G98 X40.
G80
3 - 41
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
3.24
Canned Cycle Commands,G80,G81~G89
Definition of each parameter for canned cycle commands has been described
above. The work-piece cutting application of G80~G89 is tabulated in Table 3-38.
G- code
Application
Drill Rate
G80
Cycle canceled
Drilling Canned
Cycle
Drilling Canned
Cycle
Deep Hole
Drilling (peck
drill)
--G01 Feed
rate
G01 Feed
rate
G81
G82
G83
G84
Steel threading
Boring Canned
Cycle
Boring Canned
Cycle
Boring Canned
Cycle
G85
G86
G89
G01 Feed
rate
G01
FeedRate
G01 Feed
rate
G01 Feed
rate
G01 Feed
rate
Action at
Bottom
-----
Retraction
Rate
---
---
G00 Fast
Dwell
G00 Fast
---
G00 Fast
G01 Feed
---
G01 Rate
Master axis
stop
G01 Fast
Dwell
G01 Rate
Table 3-38 G80~G89 Work-piece Cutting Application
3.25
G80 Cancellation of Canned Cycle
All canned cycle commands are cancelled by executing G80, G00 or G01.
3.26
G81 Drilling Canned Cycle
Format:
G81 X____Y____Z____R____K____F____
(X,Y)
S Start
Point
R
Point
G00 Rate
G01 Rate
Z Point (Hole
Bottom)
EX:
M3 S500
G1 Z10.
G81 X10. Y10.Z-20.R0.F500
X10.
G80
M5 S0
M30
Fig 3-39 G81 Drilling Canned Cycle
3 - 42
3 Programming and Command code
3.27
G82 Drilling Canned Cycle
Format:
G82 X____ Y____ Z____ P____ R____ F____
(X,Y)
EX:
M3 S500
S Start Point
G1 Z10.
G83 X10. Y10.Z-20.R0.Q10000 D2000
F500
R Point
X10.
G00 Rate
G80
G01 Rate
M5 S0
Z Point (Hole Bottom) M30
P (Dwell at Hole
Bottom)
Fig 3-40 G82 Drilling Canned Cycle
The difference between G81 and G82 is that G82 has a wait time (P) before
retraction when the drill bit reaches the bottom. The wait time (P) is input as an
integer in milliseconds.
3.28
G83 Deep Drilling Canned (Pack drill) Cycle
Format:
G83 X____ Y____ Z____ R____ Q____ D____ F____
S Start Point
(X,Y)
R Point
d
G00 Rate
G01 Rate
Fig 3-41 G83 Deep Drilling Canned (peck drill) Cycle
In Fig. 3-42, Q is the depth of each drilling and d is the reservation for the change
of the feed-rate from G00 to G01 after the second feeding. This data is set in
MCM parameter #282. (The d value can be changed in the graphics input form.)
3 - 43
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
3.29
G84 Tap Cutting Canned Cycle
G84 X(U)___,Y(V)___,Z(W)___,R___,Q___,F___
(X,Y)
S Start
(X,Y)
S Start
R pt.
R pt.
d
Z pt.
Z pt.
Tool retract type=0 (Full retract)
Tool retract type =1(incomplete retract)
G00 speed
G01 speed
Fig 3-42 G84 Tap Cutiing Canned Cycle
EX:
M3 S500
G1 Z10.
G84 X10. Y10.Z-20.R0.Q10000 D2000 F500 < -- incomplete retract
G84 X10. Y10.Z-20.R0.Q10000 F500
< -- Full retract
X10.
G80
M5 S0
M30
Note:
★Since drilling uses master axis positioning, do not use this function if the master
axis encoder feedback is not present.
★Ensure that the settings, parameters and feedback of master axis are correct
before performing a drilling cycle.
★In Steel Threading, Q stands for the depth of each threading, d stands for the
tool retract distance; speed of tool feed/retract is dependent on rpm; type and
distance of retract are modified on page 2 of the parameter setting. F value in
steel threading stands for pitch setting, with increments of 0.001mm.
★Tool retract type and tool retract distance (d) to be set on Page 2 of Parameter
Settings.
★If Q value is not specified, a continuous thorough run will be performed.
★For a variable frequency master axis positioned by external signals, axis
output/input points shall be assigned by the user, with PLC modified accordingly.
3 - 44
3 Programming and Command code
For any assistance, please call your local dealer or the supplier.
★For a servo master axis, performing a G84 threading activates Z-axis and C-axis
simultaneously; therefore resolution of C-axis needs to be set. For coping with
the programming process, resolution ofC-axis must be worked out with 36mm
as the definition denominator.
Example: Say feedback of master axis per revolution is 10000, then, the C-axis
resolution setting is:
Resolutionnumerator
resolutiondenominator
3.30
=
36000
10000
G85 Boring Canned Cycle
format:
G85 X_____ Y_____ Z_____ R_____ F_____
(X,Y)
S Start Point
R Point
G00 Rate
G01 Rate
Z Point (Hole
Botton)
EX:
M3 S500
G1 Z10.
G85 X10. Y10.Z-20.R0.F500
X10.
G80
M5 S0
M30
Fig 3-43 G85 Boring Canned Cycle
3.31
G86 Boring Canned Cycle (Spindle Stop at Home Bottom)
G86 X_____ Y_____ Z_____ R_____ F_____
(X,Y)
S Start Point
R Point
G00 Rate
G01 Rate
Z Point (Hole
Spindle Botton)
Stop
EX:
M3 S500
G1 Z10.
G86 X10. Y10.Z-20.R0.F500
X10.
G80
M5 S0
M30
Fig 3-44 G86 Boring Canned Cycle
3 - 45
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
The difference between G85 and G86 is that the G86 spindle stops before
retraction when the drill bit reaches the hole bottom.
3.32
G89 Boring Canned Cycle with Dwell at Hole Bottom
G89 X____ Y____ Z____ R____ P____ F____
(X,Y)
S Start Point
R Point
G00 Rate
G01 Rate
Z Point(Hole Botton)
EX:
M3 S500
G1 Z10.
G89 X10. Y10.Z-20.R0.P2000 F500
X10.
G80
M5 S0
M30
P(Dwell
at Hole
Botton)
Fig 3-45 G89 Boring Canned Cycle
The difference between G85 and G89 is that G89 has a wait time (P) before
retraction when the drill bit reaches bottom. The wait time (P) is input as an
integer in milliseconds.
3.33
G22 Linear Groove <illing(Only available in absolute mode)
G22 X___ Y___ Z____ R___ I____ J____ F____
X
Y
Z
R
I
J
F
Start point of coordinate X
Start point of coordinate Y
Grooving depth
Height of outer part
The X-axis incremental coordinate with an end
point relative to the start point.
The Y-axis incremental coordinate with an end
point relative to the start point.
Grooving speed
Action Diagram
G00 Rate
G01 Rate
R
Point
Explanation:
1.
G00 X(x) Y(y)
2.
G00 Z(r)
3.
G01 Z(z) F(f)
4.
G01 X(x+I) Y(y+j)
5.
G00 Z(r)
Z Point (Hole
Botton)
3 - 46
3 Programming and Command code
3.34
G23 Arc Groove Milling(Only available in absolute mode)
Format:
G23 X___Y___Z___R___I___J____K___T___F____
X
Y
Z
R
I
J
K
T
F
Start point coordinate
Start point coordinate
Groove depth
Height of outer part
X-axis incremental coordinates with an end point
relative to the start point.
Y-axis incremental coordinates with an end point
relative to the start point.
Radius of circle
Grooving type (0~1)
Grooving speed
Explanation:
1.
G00 X(x) Y(y)
2.
G00 Z(r)
3.
G01 Z(z) F(f)
4.
T=0; G02 U(i) V(j) R(k) F(f)
T=1; G03 U(i) V(j) R(k) F(f)
5.
G00 Z(r)
The gray area shows the cutting trajectory.
Action Diagram
Action Diagram
PS. R-value is positive when an arc less than
180-degrees is cut.
R-value is negative when an arc greater
than 180-degrees is cut.
3.35
G24 Square Groove Milling (Only avaiable in absolute mode)
G24
X___Y___Z___R___I___J____D___T___F____
X
Y
Z
R
I
J
D
T
F
Start point coordinate
Start point coordinate
Groove depth
Height of outer part
Groove width
Groove length
Tool radius
Groove type (0~1)
Groove Speed
3 - 47
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Explanation:
T=0;
1.
G00 X(x) Y(y)
2.
G00 Z(r)
3.
G01 Z(z)
4.
G01 U(i)
5.
G01 V( )
6.
G01-U(i)
7.
G01-V(j)
8.
G00 Z(r)
T=1;
Cutting Diagram
As shown in the above figure, an inner square is cut in a S-shaped groove-milling
manner. Then cut again along the side to remove the part that is not cut during the
S-shaped groove milling process.
3.36
G25 Round Groove Milling (Only available in absolute mode)
G24 X___Y___Z___R___K___D___T___F____
X
Y
Z
R
K
D
T
F
Center coordinate
Center coordinate
Groove depth
Height of outer part
Radius of circle
Tool diameter
Groove type
Groove speed
Explanation:
T=0;
1.
G00 X(x-k) Y(y)
2.
G00 Z(r)
3.
G01 Z(z) F(f)
4.
G02 I(k) J(0) R(k) F(f)
3 - 48
3 Programming and Command code
5.
G00 Z(r)
T=1;
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G00 X(x-k) Y(y)
G00 Z(r)
G01 U(d) F(f)
G01 Z(z) F(f)
G02 I(k) J(0) R(k) F(f)
IF (k>d)
THEN {[k=k-d]and[goto N3]}
G00 Z(r)
3.37
Special Canned Cycle
The special canned cycle should go with the canned cycle commands G81~G89.
Before using the special canned cycle, the commands should be used to specify
the hole processing data.
If no hole processing data is specified by executing the canned cycle commands,
the special canned cycle command only provides positioning functions without
drilling.
Tools traveling between holes at the highest speed (G00).
3.38
G34 Circular Drilling Canned Cycle
G34 X___Y___ I___J____K___F____
X
Y
I
J
K
F
Center coordinates
Center coordinates
Radius of circle r
Angle of the first hole –θ
The amount of circular holes – n
Drilling speed
The amount of
circular holes
EX:
N001 G81 Z-100. R-50.K0 F100
ÅDefinition of drilling resource
N002 G34 X100. Y100. I50. J45. K4
N003 G80ÅCanned cycle command canceled
3 - 49
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
3.39
G35 Angular Linear Drilling Canned Cycle
G35 X___Y___ I___J____K___F____
X
Y
I
J
K
F
Action Diagram
Start point coordinate
Start point coordinate
Drilling distance d
Angle – θ
The amount of linear holes – n
Drilling speed
Amount of
linear holes
EX:
N001 G81 Z-100. R-50.K0 F100 ÅDefinition of drilling data
N002 G35 X100. Y100. I50. J45. K4
N003 G80
Canned cycle command canceled
3.40
G36 Arc Drilling Canned Cycle
G36 X___Y___ I___J____P____K___F____
X
Y
I
J
P
K
F
Center coordinate
Center coordinate
Circle radius
Angle of the first hole – θ
Angle of each drilling
The number of arc holes
F Drilling speed
Center of
coordinate
Amount of arc
holes
EX:
N001 G81 Z-100. R-50.K0 F100
ÅDefinition of drilling data
N002 G36 X100. Y100. I50. J10.P30. K4
N003 G80
ÅCanned cycle command
3.41
G37 Grid Drilling Canned Cycle
G37 X___Y___ I___P___J____K___F____
X
Start point coordinate
Y
Start point coordinate
I
X-axis space
P
Drilling Numbers of X-axis
J
Y-axis space
K
Drilling Numbers of Y-axis
F
Number of grid holes
Example:
N001 G81 Z-100. R-50.K0 F100
N002 G37 X100. Y100. I10.P4 J10. K3
N003 G80
3 - 50
3 Programming and Command code
3.42
Auxiliary Function,M-code,S-code
The auxiliary function M-code (referred to as M-code) consists of a capital letter M
followed by a 2-digit number. The M-code ranges 00~99 and each code
represents a different action. The following M-codes are used by H6C-M system
and no customers are allowed access.
M00 Program Stop.
When the program runs to this point, all processing actions stop,
including spindle and coolant. Press the "CYCST" key to restart the
program from where it stopped.
M01 Optional Stop.
See more details in Sec.6 of Chap 8.
M02 Program End.
M30 Program Finished.
The program finishes at this point and returns to the start point.
M98 Subprogram Call.
M99 Subprogram End.
Except for the above M-codes that cannot be changed, customers may define
other M-codes in the PLC if required. Examples of some general settings are
shown below. These examples are also parts of the H6C-M standard PLC Ladder.
M03
M04
M05
M08
M09
Spindle rotation in normal direction.
Spindle rotation in reversed direction.
Spindle rotation stops.
Coolant ON.
Coolant OFF.
The auxiliary function S-code is used to control the rpm of the spindle. The
maximum setting is S999999.
Ex: S1000 means that the spindle rotates at 1000 rev/min
3.43
Subprogram
If there are some program or command groups requiring repeated execution, you
can store these program or command groups in memory as a subprogram. This
can simplify the design of the program and make the structure of the main
program more succinct. The subprogram can be executed during automatic
operation and a subprogram can call another subprogram.
3.43.1
Subprogram Structure
The structure of the subprogram is pretty much the same as the main program
except that the subprogram ends with M99.
PROGRAM 05
.....Subprogram code
3 - 51
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
.....Program content
.....Program content
.....Program end
M99
If the subprogram is not called by the main program but executed by directly
pressing "CYCST", it stops after executing 8,000,000 times.
3.43.2
Execution of Subprogram
Format:
M98 P____L____
P : Subprogram code
L : Execution times of the subprogram. If not specified, the subprogram
executes only once.
Ex:
M98 P05
.....Execute subprogram No 5 once.
M98 P05 L3
.....Execute subprogram No 5 three times.
Stepwise Call: The main program calls the first subprogram, and the first
subprogram calls the second subprogram in turn. The H6C-M Series controller
provides a maximum of 5 levels stepwise call, as shown in the following figure:
PROGRAM 1
PROGRAM 2
PROGRAM 3
PROGRAM 4
N1 ...
.
.
N1 ...
.
.
N1 ...
.
.
N1 ...
.
.
N5M98P2
.
.
N31 M2
N5M98P3
.
.
N32 M99
N5M98P4
.
.
N32 M99
N5M98P5
.
.
N32 M99
PROGRAM 5
N1 ...
.
.
.
.
.
N31 M99
Fig 3-46 Subprogram Stepwise Call
The M98 and M99 block settings shall not contain any displacement, such as X.., Z...
3.44
Customized program Group [MACRO] Command G65
G65 is used for basic and logic operations for some variables and executes the
program branching function after analyzing a specified variable. G65 is available
to the main program and subprogram. A group of G65 can be formed as an
independent program group with the same structure as the subprogram. For
definition of each operator with respect to a program group command, refer to
Table 3-4.
G65 Format:
3 - 52
3 Programming and Command code
G65 Lm P#i A#j B#k
L, P, A, B :
G65 codes are unchangeable.
m
: Operation code as defined in Table 3-3.
Ex.: L2 stands for addition (+) and L3 stands for subtraction (-).
#i
: Functions.
1. P#i is the location to store the result of mathematical operations.
2. Pi is the program serial number for line feed when a function is
deemed as valid.
#j
: Variable name 1. This function represents a variable number a
constant.
CASE1:A#j: j represents a variable number in the range 1 -- 9999.
CASE2:Aj :j represents a constant in the range -9999999 --9999999.
Please note that the format "Aj" has no "#".
#k
: Variable name 2. This function represents a variable number or a
constant.
CASE1:A#j, j represents a variable number ranging 1 -- 9999.
CASE2:Aj, j represents a constant ranging from “-“ 9999999 to “--”
9999999.
Please note that the format "Aj" has no "#".
Variable Explanations:
1. Variable #i
#1~#9999
: User defined variables,
The can be stored when the power is turned off.
#10000 and above: These are read-only controller system variables. No
changes are allowed.
2. All variables (#i, #j, #k) can only contain integers. No decimal should be used.
#i must be positive, while #j and #k can be positive or negative. A negative
integer indicates that the sign of the value contained in that variable is inverted.
Ex. 1: #2 = 99
; #1 = -#2 = -99。
G65 L01 P#1 A-#2
Ex. 2: #2 = 25, #3 = 5
G65 L04 P#1 A#2 B-#3
; #1 = #2× -#3 = -125。
3. If the content value of #j and #k is entered as a constant, it must be an integer
(max 7 digits, + or -). The input unit is depending on the decimal format of the
G65 command. Refer to Sec. 6.5 for details.
Decimal
Point
Unit
Ex.: 250
entered
1 (6/1
format)
100µm
2 (5/2
format)
10µm
3 (4/3
format)
1µm
4 (3/4
format)
0.1µm
25000µm
2500µm
250µm
25µm
3 - 53
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Table 3-4 Mathematical Operator Definitions For HUST G65 Command
G- code L- code
Operator Definition
Mathematical Definitions
G65
L01
Equal or Substitution,
#i = #j
G65
L02
Addition
#i = #j + #k
G65
L03
Subtraction
#i = #j - #k
G65
L04
Multiplication
#i = #j x #k
G65
L05
Division
#i = #j / #k
Place
Data
into
G65
L06
#i = #j
Variables
G65
L07
Copy Variables
G65
L11
Logic OR,
#i = #j .OR. #k
G65
L12
Logic AND,
#i = #j .AND. #k
G65
L13
Logic XOR,
#i = #j .XOR. #k
G65
L14
ROL, rotate left
G65
L15
ROR, rotate right
G65
L16
LSL, move left
G65
L17
LSR, move right
G65
L21
Subduplicate
#i = √#j
G65
L22
Absolute
#i = |#j|
#i = #J - trunc(#j/#k) x #k
G65
L23
Complement
trunc:(Disregard values less than 1)
Combined Mul/Div
G65
L26
#i = (#i x #j) / #k
Operation
G65
L31
Sin
#i = #j x Sin(#k)
G65
L32
Cos
#i = #j x Cos(#k)
G65
L33
Tangent (Tan)
G65
L34
Arctangent (Tan –1 )
G65
L50
Obtain Data in Register #i = #j
G65
L51
Obtain I-Bit data
#i = #j
G65
L52
Obtain O-Bit data
#i = #j
G65
L53
Obtain C-Bit data
#i = #j
G65
L54
Obtain S-Bit data
#i = #j
G65
L55
Obtain A-Bit data
#i = #j
G65
L56
Obtain Counter Data
#i = #j
G65
L60
Register Setting
#i = #j
G65
L66
Counter Setting
#i = #j
Unconditional
Go To n; program goes to block
G65
L80
Branching
number 'n'
G65
L81
Conditional Branching 1 If #j = #k, Go To n
G65
L82
Conditional Branching 2 If #j #k, Go To n
G65
L83
Conditional Branching 3 If #j > #k, Go To n
G65
L84
Conditional Branching 4 If #j < #k, Go To n
G65
L85
Conditional Branching 5 If #j #k, Go To n
G65
L86
Conditional Branching 6 If #j #k, Go To n
User Defined Error
Error signals display = i+50
G65
L99
Signal
(i=1~49)
Note: The range of computation is from (–9999.999) to (+9999.999).
3 - 54
3 Programming and Command code
Mathematical Operation Examples (See Table 3-4)
1. Equal or Substitution
G65 L1 P#i A#j
; #i = #j
Ex. 1: #10 initial value=0, for #10 = 150
Command
: G65 L1 P#10 A150
Result
: #10 = 150
Ex. 2: #10 initial value=0, #5 initial value=1200, for #10 = #5
Command
: G65 L1 P#10 A#5
Result
: #10 = 1200
Ex. 3: #10 initial value=0, #5 initial value=1200, for #10 = -#5
Command
: G65 L1 P#10 A-#5
Result
: #10 = -1200
2. Addition
G65 L2 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = #j + #k
Ex. 1: #10 initial value=99, #5 initial value=1200, for #1 = #10 + #5
Command
: G65 L2 P#1 A#10 B#5
Result
: #1 = #10 + #5 = 1299
Ex. 2: #10 initial value=99, for #10 = #10 + 1
Command
: G65 L2 P#10 A#10 B1
Result
: #10 = #10 + 1 = 100
3. Subtraction
G65 L3 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = #j - #k
Ex. 1: #10 initial value=1200, #5 initial value=99, for #1 = #10 - #5
Command
: G65 L3 P#1 A#10 B#5
Result
: #1 = #10 - #5 = 1101
Ex. 2: #10 initial value=99, for #10 = #10 - 1
Command
: G65 L2 P#10 A#10 B1
Result
: #10 = #10 - 1 = 98
3 - 55
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
4. Multiply
G65 L4 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = #j × #k
The result of multiplication should be in the range of -9999.999~+9999.999.
Otherwise, the system operation results in error.
Ex. 1: #4 initial value=10, #30 initial value=25, for #10= #4 × #30
Command
: G65 L4 P#10 A#4 B#30
Result
: #10 = #4 × #30 = 250
Ex. 2: #4 initial value=100000, #30 initial value=25000,
for #10 = #4 × #30
Command
: G65 L4 P#10 A#4 B#30
Result
: #10 = ?????
(HUST H6C-M controller cannot handle the
multiplied values greater than 9999.999.)
5. Division
G65 L5 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = #j / #k
Results less than 1 are disregarded.
Ex. 1: #4 initial value=130, #30 initial value=25, for #10= #4 / #30
Command
: G65 L5 P#10 A#4 B#30
Result
: #10 = #4 / #30 = 5 ( 130/25 = 5.2 )
Ex. 2: #4 initial value=10, for #10 = #4 / 30
Command
: G65 L5 P#10 A#4 B30
Result
: #10 = #4 / 30 = 0
6. Place Data into Variables
G65 L6 P# i A#j B#k
; # i …. #( i+k) = # j
Ex. 1: initial value #10=100, #11=20, #13=50, #5=99
for #10 = #11 = #12 = #13 = #14 = #5
Command
: G65 L6 P#10 A#5 B5
Result
: #10 = #11 = #12 = #13 = #14 = #5 = 99
Ex. 2: For #10 …..#(10+N-1) = 100, N = #3 = 4
Command
: G65 L6 P#10 A100 B#3
Result
: #10 = #11 = #12 = #13 = 100
3 - 56
3 Programming and Command code
7. Copying Variables
G65 L7 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = #j; #(i+1)=#(j+1) ….
If #i plus 900000
; #(#i) =#j; #(#i)+1=#(j+1)
Note: 0 < #k < 1024
Ex. 1: Copy #10 ….. #20 to #125…. #135
Command
: G65 L7 P#125 A#10 B11
Result
: #125=#10, #126=#11, #127=#12, #128=#13
#129=#14, #130=#15, #131=#16, #132=#17
#133=#18, #134=#19, #135=#20
Ex. 2: Copy #1 ….. #5 to #256…. #260
Initial value
: #256 = 101, #1 = 301
Command
: G65 L7 P#256 A#1 B5
Result
: #256 = #1 = 301, #257 = #2, #258 =#3,
#259 = #4, #260 = #5
Ex. 3: Copy #1 ….. #5 to #101…. #105
Initial value
: #256 = 101, #101 = 121、#1 = 301
Command
: G65 L7 P#900256 A#1 B80
Result
: #101 = #1 = 301, #102 = #2, #103 =#3,
#104 = #4, #105 = #5
8. Logic OR
G65 L11 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = #j .OR. #k
Ex. 1: For #10 = #5 .OR. #20, #5 = 12, #20=100
Command
: G65 L11 P#10 A#5 B#20
Result
: #10 = 12 .OR. 100 = 108
Ex. 2: For #10 = #10 .OR. 10, #10 = 15
Command
: G65 L11 P#10 A#10 B10
Result
: #10 = 15 .OR. 10 = 15
9. Logic AND
G65 L12 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = #j .AND. #k
Ex. 1: For #10 = #5 .AND. #20, #5 = 12, #20=100
Command
: G65 L12 P#10 A#5 B#20
3 - 57
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Result
: #10 = 12 .AND. 100 = 4
Ex. 2: For #10 = #10 .AND. 10, #10 = 15
Command
: G65 L12 P#10 A#10 B10
Result
: #10 = 15 .AND. 10 = 10
10. Logic XOR
G65 L13 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = #j .XOR. #k
Ex. 1: For #10 = #5 .XOR. #20, #5 = 4, #20=100
Command
: G65 L13 P#10 A#5 B#20
Result
: #10 = 4 .XOR. 100 = 96
Ex. 2: For #10 = #10 .XOR. 10, #10 = 15
Command
: G65 L11 P#10 A#10 B10
Result
: #10 = 15 .XOR. 10 = 5
11. ROL (Rotate Left)
G65 L14 P#i A#j B#k
In a 16-bit (Bit15 to Bit0) rotation, Bit15 shifts to Bit0 when rotating to the left.
Where calculation exceeds 16 bits, the bits after Bit15 are disregarded.
Bit 15 14 … …
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2
1
0
x
x
x
2
1
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
1
Ex. 1: Initial value #10 = 49152
Command
: G65 L14 P#12 A#10 B1 (ROL once)
Result
: #12 = 32769
Bit 15 14 … …
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 15 14 … …
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
3 - 58
3 Programming and Command code
Ex. 2: Initial value #10 = 7
Command
: G65 L14 P#12 A#10 B1 (ROL once)
Result
: #12 = 14
Bit 15 14 … …
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 15 14 … …
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
0
1
1
0
2
1
0
1
1
0
2
1
0
1
0
1
0
Ex. 3: Initial value #10 = -2
Command
: G65 L14 P#12 A#10 B1 (ROL once)
Result
: #12 = -3
Bit 15 14 … …
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 15 14 … …
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12. ROR (Rotate Right)
G65 L15 P# i A#j B#k
In a 16-bit (Bit15 to Bit0) rotation, Bit0 shifts to Bit15 during right rotation. Where
calculation exceeds 16 bits, bits after Bit15 are disregarded.
Bit 15 14 … …
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Ex. 1: Initial value #10 = 3
3 - 59
x
x
x
x
x
2
1
0
x
x
x
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Command
: G65 L15 P#12 A#10 B1 (ROR once)
Result
: #12 = 32769
Bit 15 14 … …
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 15 14 … …
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
1
1
2
1
0
0
0
1
2
1
0
1
1
0
2
1
0
0
1
1
2
1
0
x
x
x
1
Ex. 2: Initial value #10 = 6
Command
: G65 L15 P#12 A#10 B1 (ROR once)
Result
: #12 =3
Bit 15 14 … …
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 15 14 … …
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
13. LSL (Move Left)
G65 L16 P#i A#j B#k
Bit 15 14 … …
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Ex. 1: Initial value #10 = 13
Command
: G65 L16 P#12 A#10 B2 (LSL twice)
Result
: #12 = 52
3 - 60
3 Programming and Command code
Bit 15 14 … …
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Bit 15 14 … …
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
2
1
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
1
0
0
2
1
0
x
x
x
2
1
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
0
1
1
14. LSR (Move Right)
G65 L17 P#i A#j B#k
Bit 15 14 … …
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Ex. 1: Initial value #10 = 13
Command
: G65 L17 P#12 A#10 B2 (LSR twice)
Result
: #12 = 3
Bit 15 14 … …
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Bit 15 14 … …
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15. Subduplicate
G65 L21 P#i A#j
; #i = # j
Results less than 1 are disregarded.
Ex. 1: For #10 = #5 , #5 = 30
Command
: G65 L21 P#10 A#5
Result
: #10 = 5
3 - 61
0
0
0
0
0
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
16. Absolute
G65 L22 P#i A#j
; #i = |#j|
Ex. 1: For #10 = ABS (#5) , #5 = -30
Command
: G65 L21 P#10 A#5
Result
: #10 = 30
17. Complement
G65 L23 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = #J-{Trunc(#j/#k) × #k}
Trunc(x) : For the integer of Function x.
Trunc(3.5) = 3
Ex. 1: For the remainder of #5/12 with #5 = 99
Command
: G65 L23 P#10 A#5 B12
Result
: #10 = #5 - [Trunc(#5/12)×12]
= 99 - [ 8 × 12 ]
=3
18. Combined Multiplication and Division Operation
G65 L26 P#i A#j B#k
; #i =( #i × #j )/#k
Note 1: HUST H6C-M controller cannot handle multiplied values greater than
9999.999. However, if you use G65 L26 for the operation, the multiplied
value can exceed 7 digits as long as the final result after division is less
than 7 digits.
Example: #1 = 10000, #2 = 30000, #3 = 1000
For (#1× #2)/#3
Command : G65 L04 P#5 A#1 B#2
G65 L05 P#6 A#5 B#3
No correct value is acquired using this command, because the computed
value of G65 04 exceeds 7 digits. However, if the command is changed
to the following:
Command
:G65 L26 P#1 A#2 B#3
Result
:#1 = #1× #2 / #3 = 300000
Ex. 1:#5 =12, #10 = 15, #15 = 3
Command
: G65 L26 P#5 A#10 B#15
Result
: #5 = (#5 ×#10)/#15
= (12 × 15)/3
= 60
Ex. 2: #5 =120, #10 = 15000, #15 = 3000
3 - 62
3 Programming and Command code
Command
: G65 L26 P#5 A#10 B#15
Result
: #5 = (#5 ×#10)/#15
= (120 × 15000)/3000
= 600
19. Sin
G65 L31 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = #j × Sin(#k)
Note 1: The angle #k has 5 integers and 2 decimals in this format.
#k = 4500 stands for #k = 45°
Note 2: Since Sin(#K) ≦ 1 and the HUST H6C-M system does not operate on
decimals, the numbers after the decimal point, if any, will be
automatically disregarded. Therefore, G65 L31 must by multiplied by a
number #J. For example: #1 = Sin45°= 0.707. The format of 0.707 in
the system is 0000707, so the operation is G65 L31 P#1 A1000 B4500.
Ex. 1: For #1 = Sin60°
Command
: G65 L31 P#1 A1000 B6000
Result
: #1 = 1000 × Sin 60°=866
20. Cos
G65 L32 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = #j × Cos(#k)
Note 1: The angle #k has 5 integers and 2 decimals in format.
#k = 4500 stands for #k = 45°
Note 2: Since Cos(#K) ≦ 1 and the HUST H6C-M system does not operate on
decimals, the numbers after the decimal point, if any, will be
automatically disregarded.
Therefore, G65 L31 must by multiplied by a number #J. For example: #1 =
Cos 45°= 0.707. The format of 0.707 in the system is 0000707, so the
operation is G65 L32 P#1 A1000 B4500.
Ex. 1: For #1 = Cos30°
Command
: G65 L32 P#1 A1000 B3000
Result
: #1 = 1000 × Cos30°=866
21. Tangent
G65 L33 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = #j × tan(#k)
Note 1: The angle #k has 5 integers and 2 decimals in this format.
#k = 4500 stands for #k = 45°
3 - 63
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Note 2: The numbers after the decimal point, if any, will be automatically
disregarded.
Therefore, G65 L33 must by multiplied by a number #J. For example: #1 =
tan60°= 1.732. The format of 1.732 in the system is 0001732, so the
operation is G65 L33 P#1 A1000 B6000.
Ex. 1: For #1 = tan30°
Command
: G65 L33 P#1 A1000 B3000
Result
: #1 = 1000 ×tan30°(0.577)=577
22. Arctanent
G65 L34 P#i A#j B#k
; #i = Tan-1(#j/#k)
Note: The acquired #i has 5 integers and 2 decimals in format.
For example: #i = Tan-1( 300/300) = 4500 (45O)
Ex. 1: For #1 = Tan-1 (577/1000) = 30°
Command
: G65 L34 P#1 A577 B1000
Result
: #1 = Tan-1 (577/1000) = 003000
23. Obtain Data in Register
G65 L50 P#i A#j
; #i = R(#j)
Note: Function A#j ranging 0… 255 (R000 …. R255)
Ex. 1: Initial value #10 = 11, R5 = 3
Command
: G65 L50 P#10 A5
Result
: #10 = R5 = 3
Ex. 2: Initial value #10 = 11, #5 = 3, R3 = 9
Command
: G65 L50 P#10 A#5
Result
: #10 = R#5 = R3 = 9
3 - 64
3 Programming and Command code
Functions G65 L51, G65 L52, G65 L53, G65 L54, G65 L55 are used to acquire
PLC-IOCSA status signal. A#J in the function acquires 16-bit data at a time.
G65 L51
G65 L52
G65 L53
G65 L54
G65 L55
I-BIT
O-BIT
C-BIT
S-BIT
A-BIT
#J=0
I000..I015 O000..O015 C000..C015 S000..S015 A000..A015
#J=1
I016..I023
xxxxxx
C016..C031 S016..S031 A016..A031
#J=2
xxxxxxx
xxxxxx
C032..C047 S032..S047 A032..A047
#J=3
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C048..C063 S048..S063 A048..A063
#J=4
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C064..C079 S064..S079 A064..A079
#J=5
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C080..C095 S080..S095 A080..A095
#J=6
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C096..C111 S096..S111 A096..A111
#J=7
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C112..C127 S112..S127 A112..A127
#J=8
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C128..C143 S128..S143 A128..A143
#J=9
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C144..C159 S144..S159 A144..A159
#J=10
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C160..C175 S160..S175 A160..A175
#J=11
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C176..C191 S176..S191 A176..A191
#J=12
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C192..C207 S192..S207 A192..A207
#J=13
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C208..C223 S208..S223 A208..A223
#J=14
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C224..C239 S224..S239 A224..A239
#J=15
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
C240..C255 S240..S255 A240..A255
24. Obtain I-Bit Data
G65 L51 P#i A#j
; #i = #j = I(#j×16)…I(#j×16+15)
Note 1: Function A#j ranging 0… 1 (I000 …. I023)。
Ex. 1: For #10 = I016 .. I023
Command
: G65 L51 P#10 A1
Result
: #10 = 229
3 - 65
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx I23 I22 I21 I20 I19 I18 I17 I16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
25. Obtain O-Bit Data
G65 L52 P#i A#j
; #i=#j=O(#j×16)…O(#j×16+15)
Note 1: Function A#J ranging 0 (O000 …. O015)
Ex. 1: For #10 = O000 .. O015
Command
: G65 L52 P#10 A1
Result
: #10 = 229
O15 O14 O13 O12 O11 O10 O09 O08 O07 O06 O05 O04 O03 O02 O01 O00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
26. Obtain C-Bit Data
G65 L53 P#i A#j
; #i=#j= C(#j×16)…C(#j×16+15)
Note 1: Function A#J ranging 0… 15 (C000 …. C255)。
Ex. 1: for #10 = C016 .. C031
Command
: G65 L53 P#10 A1
Result
: #10 = 229
C31 C30 C29 C28 C27 C26 C25 C24 C23 C22 C21 C20 C19 C18 C17 C16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
27. Obtain S-Bit Data
G65 L54 P#i A#j
; #i = #j = S(#j×16)…S(#j×16+15)
Note 1: Function A#J ranging 0… 15 (S000 …. S255)。
Ex. 1: for #10 = S016 .. S031
Command
: G65 L54 P#10 A1
Result
: #10 = 229
S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
3 - 66
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
3 Programming and Command code
28. Obtain A-Bit Data
G65 L55 P#i A#j
; #i=#j=A(#j×16)…A(#j×16+15)
Note 1: Function A#J ranging 0… 63 (A000 ….A1023)。
Ex. 1: for #10 = A016 .. A031
Command
: G65 L55 P#10 A1
Result
: #10 = 229
A31 A30 A29 A28 A27 A26 A25 A24 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
29. Obtain Counter Data
G65 L56 P#i A#j
; #i = Counter#j
Note 1: Function A#J ranging 0… 255 (C000 ….C255)。
Ex. 1: for #3 = Counter 10, Counter 10 =100
Command
: G65 L56 P#3 A10
Result
: #3=100
30. Register Setting
G65 L60 P#i A#j
; Register#i = #j
Note 1: Function P#i ranging 0… 255 (R000 ….R255)。
Ex.: For R10 =#3, #3=100
Command
: G65 L60 P#10 A#3
Result
: Register 10=100
31. Counter Setting
G65 L66 P#i A#j
; Counter#i = #j
Note 1: Function P#J ranging 0… 255 (C000 ….C255)。
Ex.: For CNT10 =#3, #3=100
Command
: G65 L66 P#10 A#3
Result
: Counter 10=100
32. Unconditional Branching
3 - 67
1
0
1
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
G65 L80 Pn
; Program branches to block number 'n'.
Ex. 1:
Program:
N10 G65 L80 P4
N20 X100.
N30 Y200.
N40 M02
Result: When the program runs to N10, it branches to N40 and ignores N20 &
N30.
Note: The program number in G65 block must be same as the program
number to be located. P50, P050, P0050 represents different program
numbers.
33. Conditional Branching 1
G65 L81 Pn A#j B#k
; If #j = #k branches to n
Ex. 1:
Program:
N10 G65 L01 P#1 A10
N20 G65 L81 P50 A#1 B10
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 M02
Result: N10 sets #1=10, so when the program runs to N20, it branches to N50
and ignores N30 & N40 because #1=10 is true.
Ex. 2:
Program:
N10 G65 L01 P#1 A20
N20 G65 L81 P50 A#1 B10
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 M02
Result: N10 sets #1=20, so when the program runs to N20 in the sequence
N10→N20→N30 because #1=10 is false.
34. Conditional Branching 2
G65 L82 Pn A#j B#k
; If #j≠#k branches to n
Ex. 1:
Program:
N10 G65 L01 P#1 A20
N20 G65 L82 P50 A#1 B10
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 M02
3 - 68
3 Programming and Command code
Result: N10 sets #1=20, so when the program runs to N20, it branches to N50
and ignores N30 & N40 because #1≠10 is true.
35. Conditional Branching 3
G65 L83 Pn A#j B#k
; If #j>#k branches to n
Ex. 1:
Program:
N10 G65 L01 P#1 A20
N20 G65 L83 P50 A#1 B10
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 M02
Result: N10 sets #1=20, so when the program runs to N20, it branches to N50
and ignores N30 & N40 because #1>10 is true.
36. Conditional Branching 4
G65 L84 Pn A#j B#k
; If #j<#k branches to n
Ex. 1:
Program:
N10 G65 L01 P#1 A10
N20 G65 L84 P50 A#1 B100
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 M02
Result: N10 sets #1=100, so when the program runs to N20, it branches to
N50 and ignores N30 & N40 because #1<100 is true.
37. Conditional Branching 5
G65 L85 Pn A#j B#k
; If #j #k branches to n
Ex. 1:
Program:
N10 G65 L01 P#1 A100
N20 G65 L85 P50 A#1 B10
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 M02
Result: N10 sets #1=100, so when the program runs to N20, it branches to
N50 and ignores N30 & N40 because #1≧10 is true.
Ex. 2:
Program:
N10 G65 L01 P#1 A100
N20 G65 L85 P50 A#1 B100
3 - 69
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 M02
Result: N10 sets #1=100, so when the program runs to N20, it branches to
N50 and ignores N20 & N30 & N40 because #1≧100 is true.
38. Conditional Branching 6
G65 L86 Pn A#j B#k
;If #j #k branches to n
Ex. 1:
Program:
N10 G65 L01 P#1 A20
N20 G65 L86 P50 A#1 B100
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 M02
Result: N10 sets #1=20, so when the program runs to N20, it branches to N50
and ignores N30 & N40 because #1 100 is true.
Ex. 2:
Program:
N10 G65 L01 P#1 A20
N20 G65 L86 P50 A#1 B20
N30 X100.
N40 Y100.
N50 M02
Result: N10 sets #1=20, so when the program runs to N20, it branches to N50
and ignores N30 & N40 because #1 20 is true.
39. User Defined Error Signal
G65 L99 Pi
Note 1: Error signals display = i+50
Note 2: 1 ≦ i ≦ 49
Constant i = 1~49. If i is not within this range, ERROR 50 appears. The
displayed number of error signals is added to 50 for the user defined error
signal.
Ex.: For ERROR-60 setting
Command: G65 L99 P10
Result: Error signal display 60 = 10 + 50
Example of Cutting Application for Sealing Machines:
In this example, the G65 command is used for the stop action before cutting of a
3 - 70
3 Programming and Command code
sealing machine. A sensor is used to check the changing color tones or patterns
of the material. The following only introduces part of the main program, which also
forms an independent subprogram. The program is divided into two parts: sensor
(I005 signal) On and Off.
Variable: #01 = Total cutting length.
#02 = Length required for sensor inspection.
#03 = G01 length.
#04 = Sensing speed.
I007
Feeding direction
I005 On (1)
#02
#12
I005 Off (0)
Var. #01
Fig. 3-47
G65 L51 P#10 A0
G65 L12 P#11 A#10 B32
...
...
G65 L82 P0010 A#11 B32
G65 L84 P0020 A#01 B#02
G65 L03 P#12 A#01 B#02
G01 U#12 F#03
G31 U#02 F#04
M02
N0010 G01 U#01 F#03
M02
N0020 G65 L99 P1
M02
Receive I000~I007 signal
Make sure I005 = 1 (On)
Note that 32 = 00100000(binary)
If I005= 1 goes to N0010
If #01<#02 goes to N0020
#12 = #01 - #02
Program for sensor I005 = 1
Program for sensor I005 = 0
If #01<#02, Error 51 appears.
3 - 71
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
3 - 72
4 MCM Parameters
4
MCM (Machine Constant) PARAMETERS
4.1
MCM Parameter Setting
The MCM parameter setting function allows the user to define the system
constants of the controller according to mechanical specifications and
machining conditions. The correct and proper setting of these constants is
important in the operation of the mechanical system and fabrication of the workpiece. Make sure that the setting is correct. Press RESET to restart the
machine when the MCM parameter is set successfully.
The MCM Parameter Setting List is shown on the following page. You can
configure MCM parameters with reference to this list.
How to Read and Change MCM parameters:
(1)
Use the MCM parameter set screen 1
1. Enter MDI mode, executive M9998 instruction.
2. Enter Tool Compensation screen.
3. Press the F3 function key.
4. Use Page↑/Page↓to switch to the next or previous page. 10
parameters are displayed on each page. After modify the MCM
parameters, must press the“RESET”button before left.
5. F8 key can be used to switch the A ~ W axis configuration options
MCM parameter set screen
Fig 4-1 Page1
4-1
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Fig 4-2 Page2
Fig 4-3 Page3
4-2
4 MCM Parameters
(2)
Use the MCM parameter set screen 2:MCM parameter Table
1. Enter MDI mode, executive M9998 instruction.
2. Press the start button.
3. Use Page↑/Page↓to switch to the next or previous page. 10
parameters are displayed on each page. After modify the MCM
parameters, must press the“RESET”button before left.
程式號碼:
0 程式註解:
PA#001 =
PA#002 =
PA#003 =
PA#004 =
PA#005 =
PA#006 =
PA#007 =
PA#008 =
PA#009 =
PA#010 =
X
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y
0.000
Z
0.000
待 機 - 停 止
Fig 4-4
(3)
Change via Upload from RS232C :
Use the transmission software (HCON) to send parameters to the PC for
saving as a text file. Change the parameters with PE2, HE, or other
document processing software and transmit them back to the CNC. The
trasnmission software also provides real-time online editing functions.
To Clear All Parameters to Factory Default Settings
1. Get into MDI mode by pressing
2. Key in G10 P1000, then press
AUTO
MDI
CYCST
key twice in 0.5 seconds.
key.
4-3
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
HUST H6C-M MCM Parameter
MCM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10-20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30-40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50-60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70-80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90-100
101
102
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
0
0
mm
mm
Description
st
G54 X-axis 1 Work coordinate (origin)
st
G54 Y-axis 1 Work coordinate (origin)
st
G54 Z-axis 1 Work coordinate (origin)
st
G54 A-axis 1 Work coordinate (origin)
st
G54 B-axis 1 Work coordinate (origin)
st
G54 C-axis 1 Work coordinate (origin)
st
G54 U-axis 1 Work coordinate (origin)
st
G54 V-axis 1 Work coordinate (origin)
st
G54 W-axis 1 Work coordinate (origin)
System Reserved!
nd
G55 X-axis 2 Work coordinate (origin)
nd
G55 Y-axis 2 Work coordinate (origin)
nd
G55 Z-axis 2 Work coordinate (origin)
nd
G55 A-axis 2 Work coordinate (origin)
nd
G55 B-axis 2 Work coordinate (origin)
nd
G55 C-axis 2 Work coordinate (origin)
nd
G55 U-axis 2 Work coordinate (origin)
nd
G55 V-axis 2 Work coordinate (origin)
nd
G55 W-axis 2 Work coordinate (origin)
System Reserved!
rd
G56 X-axis 3 Work coordinate (origin)
rd
G56 Y-axis 3 Work coordinate (origin)
rd
G56 Z-axis 3 Work coordinate (origin)
rd
G56 A-axis 3 Work coordinate (origin)
rd
G56 B-axis 3 Work coordinate (origin)
rd
G56 C-axis 3 Work coordinate (origin)
rd
G56 U-axis 3 Work coordinate (origin)
rd
G56 V-axis 3 Work coordinate (origin)
rd
G56 W-axis 3 Work coordinate (origin)
System Reserved!
th
G57 X-axis 4 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G57 Y-axis 4 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G57 Z-axis 4 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G57 A-axis 4 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G57 B-axis 4 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G57 C-axis 4 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G57 U-axis 4 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G57 V-axis 4 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G57 W-axis 4 Work coordinate (origin)
System Reserved!
th
G58 X-axis 5 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G58 Y-axis 5 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G58 Z-axis 5 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G58 A-axis 5 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G58 B-axis 5 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G58 C-axis 5 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G58 U-axis 5 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G58 V-axis 5 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G58 W-axis 5 Work coordinate (origin)
System Reserved!
th
G59 X-axis 6 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G59 Y-axis 6 Work coordinate (origin)
4-4
Setting
4 MCM Parameters
MCM
No.
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110-120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130-140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150-160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170-180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190-200
201
202
203
204
205
206
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
mm/min
mm/min
mm/min
mm/min
mm/min
mm/min
Description
th
G59 Z-axis 6 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G59 A-axis 6 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G59 B-axis 6 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G59 C-axis 6 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G59 U-axis 6 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G59 V-axis 6 Work coordinate (origin)
th
G59 W-axis 6 Work coordinate (origin)
System Reserved!
X-axis, G28 reference point coordinate
Y-axis, G28 reference point coordinate
Z-axis, G28 reference point coordinate
A-axis, G28 reference point coordinate
B-axis, G28 reference point coordinate
C-axis, G28 reference point coordinate
U-axis, G28 reference point coordinate
V-axis, G28 reference point coordinate
W-axis, G28 reference point coordinate
System Reserved!
X-axis, G30 reference point coordinate
Y-axis, G30 reference point coordinate
Z-axis, G30 reference point coordinate
A-axis, G30 reference point coordinate
B-axis, G30 reference point coordinate
C-axis, G30 reference point coordinate
U-axis, G30 reference point coordinate
V-axis, G30 reference point coordinate
W-axis, G30 reference point coordinate
System Reserved!
X-axis, Backlash compensation (G01), 0~9.999
Y-axis, Backlash compensation (G01), 0~9.999
Z-axis, Backlash compensation (G01), 0~9.999
A-axis, Backlash compensation (G01), 0~9.999
B-axis, Backlash compensation (G01), 0~9.999
C-axis, Backlash compensation (G01), 0~9.999
U-axis, Backlash compensation (G01), 0~9.999
V-axis, Backlash compensation (G01), 0~9.999
W-axis, Backlash compensation (G01), 0~9.999
System Reserved!
X-axis, Backlash compensation (G00), 0~9.999
Y-axis, Backlash compensation (G00), 0~9.999
Z-axis, Backlash compensation (G00), 0~9.999
A-axis, Backlash compensation (G00), 0~9.999
B-axis, Backlash compensation (G00), 0~9.999
C-axis, Backlash compensation (G00), 0~9.999
U-axis, Backlash compensation (G00), 0~9.999
V-axis, Backlash compensation (G00), 0~9.999
W-axis, Backlash compensation (G00), 0~9.999
System Reserved!
X-axis, JOG Feed-rate
Y-axis, JOG Feed-rate
Z-axis, JOG Feed-rate
A-axis, JOG Feed-rate
B-axis, JOG Feed-rate
C-axis, JOG Feed-rate
4-5
Setting
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM
No.
207
208
209
210-220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230-240
241
Factory
Default
Setting
1000
1000
1000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
100
242
100
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259-280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
287-300
301
302
303
304
305
306
207
308
309
310-320
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
Unit
Description
mm/min U-axis, JOG Feed-rate
mm/min V-axis, JOG Feed-rate
mm/min W-axis, JOG Feed-rate
System Reserved!
mm/min X-axis, G00 Traverse speed limit
mm/min Y-axis, G00 Traverse speed limit
mm/min Z-axis, G00 Traverse speed limit
mm/min A-axis, G00 Traverse speed limit
mm/min B-axis, G00 Traverse speed limit
mm/min C-axis, G00 Traverse speed limit
mm/min U-axis, G00 Traverse speed limit
mm/min V-axis, G00 Traverse speed limit
mm/min W-axis, G00 Traverse speed limit
System Reserved!
pulse X-axis,Denominator,resolution calc.(Encoder pulse)
X-axis,Numerator,resolution
calculation.(Ballµm
screwpitch)
pulse Y-axis,Denominator,resolutioncalc.(Encoder pulse)
µm
Y-axis,Numerator,resolutioncalc.(Ball-screwpitch)
pulse Z-axis,Denominator,resolutioncalc.(Encoder pulse)
µm
Z-axis,Numerator,resolutioncalc.(Ball-screwpitch)
pulse A-axis,Denominator,resolutioncalc.(Encoder pulse)
µm
A-axis,Numerator,resolutioncalc.(Ball-screwpitch)
pulse B-axis,Denominator,resolutioncalc.(Encoder pulse)
µm
B-axis,Numerator,resolutioncalc.(Ball-screwpitch)
pulse C-axis,Denominator,resolutioncalc.(Encoder pulse)
µm
C-axis,Numerator,resolutioncalc.(Ball-screwpitch)
pulse U-axis,Denominator,resolutioncalc.(Encoder pulse)
µm
U-axis,Numerator,resolutioncalc.(Ball-screwpitch)
pulse V-axis,Denominator,resolutioncalc.(Encoder pulse)
µm
V-axis,Numerator,resolutioncalc.(Ball-screwpitch)
pulse W-axis,Denominator,resolutioncalc.(Encoder pulse)
µm
W-axis,Numerator,resolutioncalc.(Ball-screwpitch)
System Reserved!
X-axis, HOME direction, 0=+ dir.1=-dir
Y-axis, HOME direction, 0=+ dir.1=-dir
Z-axis, HOME direction, 0=+ dir.1=-dir
A-axis, HOME direction, 0=+ dir.1=-dir
B-axis, HOME direction, 0=+ dir.1=-dir
C-axis, HOME direction, 0=+ dir.1=-dir
U-axis, HOME direction, 0=+ dir.1=-dir
V-axis, HOME direction, 0=+ dir.1=-dir
W-axis, HOME direction, 0=+ dir.1=-dir
System Reserved!
mm/min X-axis, HOME speed 1
mm/min Y-axis, HOME speed 1
mm/min Z-axis, HOME speed 1
mm/min A-axis, HOME speed 1
mm/min B-axis, HOME speed 1
mm/min C-axis, HOME speed 1
mm/min U-axis, HOME speed 1
mm/min V-axis, HOME speed 1
mm/min W-axis, HOME speed 1
System Reserved!
4-6
Setting
4 MCM Parameters
MCM
No.
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330-340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350-360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370-380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390-400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410-420
Factory
Default
Setting
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Unit
Description
mm/min
mm/min
mm/min
mm/min
mm/min
mm/min
mm/min
mm/min
mm/min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
1000.000
1000.000
1000.000
1000.000
1000.000
1000.000
1000.000
1000.000
1000.000
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
X-axis, Home grid speed during HOME execution
Y-axis, Home grid speed during HOME execution
Z-axis, Home grid speed during HOME execution
A-axis, Home grid speed during HOME execution
B-axis, Home grid speed during HOME execution
C-axis, Home grid speed during HOME execution
U-axis, Home grid speed during HOME execution
V-axis, Home grid speed during HOME execution
W-axis, Home grid speed during HOME execution
System Reserved!
X-axis,Home grid direction during HOME execution
Y-axis,Home grid direction during HOME execution
Z-axis,Home grid direction during HOME execution
A-axis,Home grid direction during HOME execution
B-axis,Home grid direction during HOME execution
C-axis,Home grid direction during HOME execution
U-axis,Home grid direction during HOME execution
V-axis,Home grid direction during HOME execution
W-axis,Home grid direction during HOME execution
System Reserved!
X –axis Home grid setting
Y-axis Home grid setting
Z-axis Home grid setting
A-axis Home grid setting
B-axis Home grid setting
C-axis Home grid setting
U-axis Home grid setting
V-axis Home grid setting
W-axis Home grid setting
System Reserved!
X-axis, HOME shift data
Y-axis, HOME shift data
Z-axis, HOME shift data
A-axis, HOME shift data
B-axis, HOME shift data
C-axis, HOME shift data
U-axis, HOME shift data
V-axis, HOME shift data
W-axis, HOME shift data
System Reserved!
X-axis,Setting the value of search servo grid
Y-axis,Setting the value of search servo grid
Z-axis,Setting the value of search servo grid
A-axis,Setting the value of search servo grid
B-axis,Setting the value of search servo grid
C-axis,Setting the value of search servo grid
U-axis,Setting the value of search servo grid
V-axis,Setting the value of search servo grid
W-axis,Setting the value of search servo grid
System Reserved!
X-axis Origin switch (+ :N.O (normallyopen) node; :N.C (normally closed) node)
Y-axis Origin switch (+ :N.O node; -:N.C node)
Z-axis Origin switch (+ :N.O node; - :N.C node)
421
0
422
423
0
0
4-7
Setting
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM
No.
424
425
426
427
428
429
430-440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450-460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470-480
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
481
6
482
6
483
6
484
6
485
6
486
6
487
6
488
6
489
6
490-500
501
0
502
503
0
0
Unit
Description
A-axis Origin switch (+ :N.O node; - :N.C node)
B-axis Origin switch (+ :N.O node; - :N.C node)
C-axis Origin switch (+ :N.O node; - :N.C node)
U-axis Origin switch (+ :N.O node; - :N.C node)
V-axis Origin switch (+ :N.O node; - :N.C node)
W-axis Origin switch (+ :N.O node; - :N.C node)
System Reserved!
X-axis, Direction of motor rotation, 0=CW, 1=CCW
Y-axis, Direction of motor rotation, 0=CW, 1=CCW
Z-axis, Direction of motor rotation, 0=CW, 1=CCW
A-axis, Direction of motor rotation, 0=CW, 1=CCW
B-axis, Direction of motor rotation, 0=CW, 1=CCW
C-axis, Direction of motor rotation, 0=CW, 1=CCW
U-axis, Direction of motor rotation, 0=CW, 1=CCW
V-axis, Direction of motor rotation, 0=CW, 1=CCW
W-axis, Direction of motor rotation, 0=CW, 1=CCW
System Reserved!
X-axis,Encoder pulse multiplicationfactor,1,2,or 4
Y-axis,Encoder pulse multiplicationfactor,1,2,or 4
Z-axis,Encoder pulse multiplicationfactor,1,2,or 4
A-axis,Encoder pulse multiplicationfactor,1,2,or 4
B-axis,Encoder pulse multiplicationfactor,1,2,or 4
C-axis,Encoder pulse multiplicationfactor,1,2,or 4
U-axis,Encoder pulse multiplicationfactor,1,2,or 4
V-axis,Encoder pulse multiplicationfactor,1,2,or 4
W-axis,Encoder pulse multiplicationfactor,1,2,or 4
System Reserved!
X-axis impulse command width adjustment
(4=625KPPS)
Y-axis impulse command width adjustment
(4=625KPPS)
Z-axis impulse command width adjustment
(4=625KPPS)
A-axis impulse command width adjustment
(4=625KPPS)
B-axis impulse command width adjustment
(4=625KPPS)
C-axis impulse command width adjustment
(4=625KPPS)
U-axis impulse command width adjustment
(4=625KPPS)
V-axis impulse command width adjustment
(4=625KPPS)
W-axis impulse command width adjustment
(4=625KPPS)
System Reserved!
Master/Slave mode, 0=CNC, 1=X-axis, 2=Y-axis
3=Z-axis,4=A-axis,5=B-axis,6=C-axis,7=U-axis,
8=V-axis, 9=w-axis, 256=Single non-stop
Accel/Decel mode,0=exponential,1=linear,2=”S” curve
Home command mode setting.
BIT0 = 0 , X axis find Home grid available,
= 1 , no need to find.
BIT1 = 0 , Y axis find Home grid available,
= 1 , no need to find.
4-8
Setting
4 MCM Parameters
MCM
No.
Factory
Default
Setting
Unit
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
100
100
100
100
0
4096
3000
msec
msec
msec
msec
511
0
v
512
0
513
0
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
0
0
100
100
0
64
38400
521
0
522
523
524
525
0
0
0
3
526
0
527
0
528
0
529
530
0
0
531
0
532
533
2.000
4096
534
pulse
rpm
rpm
ms
pulse
mm
pulse
Description
BIT2 = 0 , Z axis find Home grid available,
= 1 , no need to find.
BIT3 = 0 , A axis find Home grid available,
= 1 , no need to find.
BIT4 = 0 , B axis find Home grid available,
= 1 , no need to find.
BIT5 = 0 , C axis find Home grid available,
= 1 , no need to find.
BIT6 = 0 , U axis find Home grid available,
= 1 , no need to find.
BIT7 = 0 , V axis find Home grid available,
= 1 , no need to find.
BIT8 = 0 , W axis find Home grid available,
= 1 , no need to find.
G00 Linear accel./decel. Time, 4~512 ms
G01 Linear accel./decel. Time, 10~1024 ms
Accel/Decel time when in G99 mode (mm/rev)
Time Setting for spindle acceleration
System Reserved!
Spindle encoder resolution (pulse/rev)
Max. spindle rpm at 10 volts
Spindle voltage command zero drift correction (open
circuit)
Spindle voltage command acce/dece slope correction
(open circuit)
Spindle RPM correction (based on feedback from the
encoder)
Start number for program block number generation
Increment for program block number generation
Denominator of feed-rate when in MPG test mode
Numerator of feed-rate when in MPG test mode
MPG direction
Set Acceleration/Deceleration Time for MPG (4~512)
RS232 Baud rate, 38400, 19200 / EVEN /2 Bit
Setting whether R000~R99 data in PLC are stored
when power is cut off. 0=NO, 256=YES
Servo Error Counter
Radius/Diameter Programming mode
0=Metric mode, 25400=inch mode mcm541=0,1
Error in Circular Cutting, ideal value=1
Pulse settings
0: pulse + direction 1: +/- pulse 2: A/B phase
Setting G01 speed value at booting
Setting tool compensation direction =1 FAUNC, =0
HUST
G01 Linear accel./decel. Time, for ”S” curve
G31 input motion stop at hardware
Format setting
=0 standard, =1 variable automatically added with a
decimal point, =2 line editing, =4 automatically added
with a decimal point in programming
Mill mode;Setting the backlash of G83
Setting the following error count for testing
Testing the function of axial setting of the servo
following error(bit0-X..)
4-9
Setting
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM
No.
Factory
Default
Setting
Unit
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
541-560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570~580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590-600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610-620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630-640
641
642
643
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9999999
9999999
9999999
9999999
9999999
9999999
9999999
9999999
9999999
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
9999999
9999999
9999999
9999999
9999999
9999999
9999999
9999999
9999999
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
mm
mm
mm
Description
Controller ID number
Minimum slope setting of the Auto Teach function
(with use of C040)
First distance setting of the Auto Teach function ( with
use of C040)
G41 and G42 processing types
System reserved
Adjustment of the axis feedback direction.
Arc type
System Reserved!
"S" curve accel./decel. profile setting for the X-axis
"S" curve accel./decel. profile setting for the Y-axis
"S" curve accel./decel. profile setting for the Z-axis
"S" curve accel./decel. profile setting for the A-axis
"S" curve accel./decel. profile setting for the B-axis
"S" curve accel./decel. profile setting for the C-axis
"S" curve accel./decel. profile setting for the U-axis
"S" curve accel./decel. profile setting for the V-axis
"S" curve accel./decel. profile setting for the W-axis
System Reserved!
X-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 1)
Y-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 1)
Z-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 1)
A-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 1)
B-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 1)
C-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 1)
U-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 1)
V-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 1)
W-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 1)
System Reserved!
X-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 1)
Y-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 1)
Z-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 1)
A-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 1)
B-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 1)
C-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 1)
U-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 1)
V-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 1)
W-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 1)
System Reserved!
X-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 2)
Y-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 2)
Z-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 2)
A-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 2)
B-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 2)
C-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 2)
U-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 2)
V-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 2)
W-axis, Software OT limit, (+) direction (Group 2)
System Reserved!
X-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 2)
Y-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 2)
Z-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 2)
4 - 10
Setting
4 MCM Parameters
MCM
No.
644
645
646
647
648
649
650-660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670-680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690-700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710-720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
727-740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
Factory
Default
Setting
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
pulse
Description
A-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 2)
B-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 2)
C-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 2)
U-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 2)
V-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 2)
W-axis, Software OT limit, (-) direction (Group 2)
System Reserved!
X-axis, Cycle clearing w/ M02, M30, M99
Y-axis, Cycle clearing w/ M02, M30, M99
Z-axis, Cycle clearing w/ M02, M30, M99
A-axis, Cycle clearing w/ M02, M30, M99
B-axis, Cycle clearing w/ M02, M30, M99
C-axis, Cycle clearing w/ M02, M30, M99
U-axis, Cycle clearing w/ M02, M30, M99
V-axis, Cycle clearing w/ M02, M30, M99
W-axis, Cycle clearing w/ M02, M30, M99
System Reserved!
X-axis,0=incrementalcoord.,1=absolute coordinate
Y-axis,0=incrementalcoord.,1=absolute coordinate
Z-axis,0=incrementalcoord.,1=absolute coordinate
A-axis,0=incrementalcoord.,1=absolute coordinate
B-axis,0=incrementalcoord.,1=absolute coordinate
C-axis,0=incrementalcoord.,1=absolute coordinate
U-axis,0=incrementalcoord.,1=absolute coordinate
V-axis,0=incrementalcoord.,1=absolute coordinate
W-axis,0=incrementalcoord.,1=absolute coordinate
System Reserved!
X-axis, Position gain, standard=64
Y-axis, Position gain, standard=64
Z-axis, Position gain, standard=64
A-axis, Position gain, standard=64
B-axis, Position gain, standard=64
C-axis, Position gain, standard=64
U-axis, Position gain, standard=64
V-axis, Position gain, standard=64
W-axis, Position gain, standard=64
System Reserved!
X-axis,Break-over point for position gain, std=10
Y-axis,Break-over point for position gain, std=10
Z-axis,Break-over point for position gain, std=10
A-axis,Break-over point for position gain, std=10
B-axis,Break-over point for position gain, std=10
C-axis,Break-over point for position gain, std=10
U-axis,Break-over point for position gain, std=10
V-axis,Break-over point for position gain, std=10
W-axis,Break-over point for position gain, std=10
System Reserved!
X-axis, Denominator, MPG resolution calc.
X-axis, Numerator, MPG resolution calc.
Y-axis, Denominator, MPG resolution calc.
Y-axis, Numerator, MPG resolution calc.
Z-axis, Denominator, MPG resolution calc.
Z-axis, Numerator, MPG resolution calc.
A-axis, Denominator, MPG resolution calc.
4 - 11
Setting
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM
No.
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
760-780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790-800
Factory
Default
Setting
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Unit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
801
0.000
mm
802
0.000
mm
803
0.000
mm
804
0.000
mm
805
0.000
mm
806
0.000
mm
807
0.000
mm
808
0.000
mm
809
0.000
mm
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
msec
810-820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830-840
841
842
843
844
0
0
0
0
Description
A-axis, Numerator, MPG resolution calc.
B-axis, Denominator, MPG resolution calc.
B-axis, Numerator, MPG resolution calc.
C-axis, Denominator, MPG resolution calc.
C-axis, Numerator, MPG resolution calc.
U-axis, Denominator, MPG resolution calc.
U-axis, Numerator, MPG resolution calc.
V-axis, Denominator, MPG resolution calc.
V-axis, Numerator, MPG resolution calc.
W-axis, Denominator, MPG resolution calc.
W-axis, Numerator, MPG resolution calc.
System Reserved!
Set X-axis as Rotating (1) / Linear axis (0)
Set Y-axis as Rotating (1) / Linear axis (0)
Set Z-axis as Rotating (1) / Linear axis (0)
Set A-axis as Rotating (1) / Linear axis (0)
Set B-axis as Rotating (1) / Linear axis (0)
Set C-axis as Rotating (1) / Linear axis (0)
Set U-axis as Rotating (1) / Linear axis (0)
Set V-axis as Rotating (1) / Linear axis (0)
Set W-axis as Rotating (1) / Linear axis (0)
System Reserved!
Distance of S bit sent before the X-axis reaches
position. (S176)
Distance of S bit sent before the Y-axis reaches
position. (S177)
Distance of S bit sent before the Z-axis reaches
position. (S178)
Distance of S bit sent before the A-axis reaches
position. (S179)
Distance of S bit sent before the B-axis reaches
position. (S180)
Distance of S bit sent before the C-axis reaches
position. (S181)
Distance of S bit sent before the U-axis reaches
position. (S182)
Distance of S bit sent before the V-axis reaches
position. (S183)
Distance of S bit sent before the W-axis reaches
position. (S184)
System Reserved!
Set Acceleration/Deceleration Time for X-axis
Set Acceleration/Deceleration Time for Y-axis
Set Acceleration/Deceleration Time for Z-axis
Set Acceleration/Deceleration Time for A-axis
Set Acceleration/Deceleration Time for B-axis
Set Acceleration/Deceleration Time for C-axis
Set Acceleration/Deceleration Time for U-axis
Set Acceleration/Deceleration Time for V-axis
Set Acceleration/Deceleration Time for W-axis
System Reserved!
X-axis allowable compensation of back screw pitch
Y-axis allowable compensation of back screw pitch
Z-axis allowable compensation of back screw pitch
A-axis allowable compensation of back screw pitch
4 - 12
Setting
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
4 MCM Parameters
MCM
No.
845
846
847
848
849
847-850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857~860
861-940
941-1020
10211100
11011180
11811260
12611340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
Unit
Description
0
0
B-axis allowable compensation of back screw pitch
C-axis allowable compensation of back screw pitch
U-axis allowable compensation of back screw pitch
V-axis allowable compensation of back screw pitch
W-axis allowable compensation of back screw pitch
System Reserved!
X-axis length compensation of back screw pitch
Y-axis length compensation of back screw pitch
Z-axis length compensation of back screw pitch
A-axis length compensation of back screw pitch
B-axis length compensation of back screw pitch
C-axis length compensation of back screw pitch
System Reserved!
X-axis,Pitch error compensation of each segment.
Y-axis,Pitch error compensation of each segment.
0
Z-axis,Pitch error compensation of each segment.
0
A-axis,Pitch error compensation of each segment.
0
B-axis,Pitch error compensation of each segment.
0
C-axis,Pitch error compensation of each segment.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Tool #1 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #1 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #1 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #1 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #1 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #1 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #1 offset compensation
Tool #2 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #2 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #2 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #2 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #2 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #2 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #2 offset compensation
Tool #3 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #3 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #3 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #3 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #3 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #3 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #3 offset compensation
Tool #4 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #4 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #4 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #4 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #4 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #4 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #4 offset compensation
Tool #5 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #5 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #5 offset compensation
4 - 13
Setting
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM
No.
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Description
Z-axis, Tool #5 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #5 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #5 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #5 offset compensation
Tool #6 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #6 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #6 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #6 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #6 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #6 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #6 offset compensation
Tool #7 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #7 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #7 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #7 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #7 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #7 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #7 offset compensation
Tool #8 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #8 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #8 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #8 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #8 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #8 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #8 offset compensation
Tool #9 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #9 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #9 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #9 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #9 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #9 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #9 offset compensation
Tool #10 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #10 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #10 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #10 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #10 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #10 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #10 offset compensation
Tool #11 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #11 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #11 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #11 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #11 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #11 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #11 offset compensation
Tool #12 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #12 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #12 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #12 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #12 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #12 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #12 offset compensation
4 - 14
Setting
4 MCM Parameters
MCM
No.
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Description
Tool #13 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #13 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #13 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #13 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #13 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #13 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #13 offset compensation
Tool #14 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #14 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #14 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #14 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #14 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #14 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #14 offset compensation
Tool # radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #15 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #15 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #15 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #15 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #15 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #15 offset compensation
Tool #16 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #16 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #16 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #16 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #16 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #16 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #16 offset compensation
Tool #17 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #17 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #17 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #17 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #17 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #17 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #17 offset compensation
Tool #18 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #18 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #18 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #18 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #18 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #18 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #18 offset compensation
Tool #19 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #19 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #19 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #19 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #19 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #19 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #19 offset compensation
Tool #20 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #20 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #20 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #20 offset compensation
4 - 15
Setting
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM
No.
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Description
A-axis, Tool #20 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #20 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #20 offset compensation
Tool #21 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #21 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #21 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #21 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #21 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #21 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #21 offset compensation
Tool #22 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #22 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #22 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #22 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #22 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #22 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #22 offset compensation
Tool #23 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #23 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #23 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #23 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #23 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #23 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #23 offset compensation
Tool #24 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #24 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #24 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #24 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #24 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #24 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #24 offset compensation
Tool #25 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #25 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #25 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #25 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #25 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #25 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #25 offset compensation
Tool #26 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #26 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #26 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #26 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #26 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #26 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #26 offset compensation
Tool #27 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #27 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #27 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #27 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #27 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #27 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #27 offset compensation
Tool #28 radius compensation
4 - 16
Setting
4 MCM Parameters
MCM
No.
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Description
X-axis, Tool #28 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #28 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #28 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #28 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #28 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #28offset compensation
Tool #29 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #29 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #29 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #29 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #29 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #29 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #29 offset compensation
Tool #30 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #30 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #30 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #30 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #30 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #30 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #30 offset compensation
Tool 31# radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #31 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #31 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #31 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #31 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #31 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #31 offset compensation
Tool #32 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #32 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #32 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #32 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #32 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #32 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #32 offset compensation
Tool #33radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #33 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #33 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #33 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #33 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #33 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #33 offset compensation
Tool #34 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #34 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #34 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #34 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #34 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #34 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #34 offset compensation
Tool #35 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #35 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #35 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #35 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #35 offset compensation
4 - 17
Setting
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM
No.
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Description
B-axis, Tool #35 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #35 offset compensation
Tool #36 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #36 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #36 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #36 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #36 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #36 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #36 offset compensation
Tool #37 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #37 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #37 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #37 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #37 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #37 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #37 offset compensation
Tool #38 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #38 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #38 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #38 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #38 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #38 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #38 offset compensation
Tool #39 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #39 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #39 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #39 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #39 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #39 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #39 offset compensation
Tool #40 radius compensation
X-axis, Tool #40 offset compensation
Y-axis, Tool #40 offset compensation
Z-axis, Tool #40 offset compensation
A-axis, Tool #40 offset compensation
B-axis, Tool #40 offset compensation
C-axis, Tool #40 offset compensation
Tool #1 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation
Tool #2 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #2 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #2 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #2 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #2 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #2 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #2 wear compensation
Tool #3 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #3 wear compensation
4 - 18
Setting
4 MCM Parameters
MCM
No.
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Description
Y-axis, Tool #3 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #3 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #3 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #3 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #3 wear compensation
Tool #4 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #4 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #4 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #4 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #4 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #4 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #4 wear compensation
Tool #5 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #5 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #5 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #5 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #5 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #5 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #5 wear compensation
Tool #6 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #6 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #6 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #6 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #6 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #6 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #6 wear compensation
Tool #7 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #7 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #7 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #7 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #7 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #7 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #7 wear compensation
Tool #8 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #8 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #8 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #8 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #8 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #8 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #8 wear compensation
Tool #9 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #9 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #9 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #9 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #9 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #9 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #9 wear compensation
Tool #10 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #10 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #10 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #10 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #10 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #10 wear compensation
4 - 19
Setting
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM
No.
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Description
C-axis, Tool #10 wear compensation
Tool #11 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #11 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #11 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #11 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #11 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #11 wear compensation
Tool #12 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #12 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #12 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #12 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #12 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #12 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #12 wear compensation
Tool #13 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #13 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #13 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #13 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #13 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #13 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #13 wear compensation
Tool #14 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #14 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #14 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #14 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #14 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #14 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #14 wear compensation
Tool #15 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #15 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #15 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #15 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #15 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #15 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #15wear compensation
Tool #16 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #16 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #16 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #16 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #16 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #16 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #16 wear compensation
Tool #17 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #17 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #17 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #17 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #17 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #17 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #17 wear compensation
Tool #18 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #18 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #18 wear compensation
4 - 20
Setting
4 MCM Parameters
MCM
No.
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Description
Z-axis, Tool #18 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #18 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #18 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #18 wear compensation
Tool #19 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #19 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #19 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #19 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #19 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #19 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #19wear compensation
Tool #20 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #20 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #20 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #20 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #20 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #20 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #20 wear compensation
Tool #21 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #21 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #21 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #21 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #21 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #21 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #21 wear compensation
Tool #22 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #22 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #22 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #22 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #22 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #22 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #22 wear compensation
Tool #23 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #23 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #23 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #23 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #23 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #23 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #23 wear compensation
Tool #24 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #24 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #24 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #24 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #24 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #24 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #24 wear compensation
Tool #25 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #25 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #25 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #25 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #25 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #25 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #25 wear compensation
4 - 21
Setting
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM
No.
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Description
Tool #26 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #26 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #26 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #26 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #26 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #26 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #26 wear compensation
Tool #27 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #27 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #27 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #27 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #27 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #27 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #27 wear compensation
Tool #28 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #28 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #28 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #28 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #28 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #28 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #28 wear compensation
Tool #29 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #29 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #29 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #29 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #29 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #29 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #29 wear compensation
Tool #30 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #30 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #30 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #30 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #30 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #30 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #30 wear compensation
Tool #31 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #31 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #31 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #31 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #31 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #31 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #31 wear compensation
Tool #32 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #32 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #32 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #32 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #32 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #32 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #32 wear compensation
Tool #33 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #33 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #33 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #33 wear compensation
4 - 22
Setting
4 MCM Parameters
MCM
No.
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
Factory
Default
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Description
A-axis, Tool #33 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #33 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #33 wear compensation
Tool #34 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #34 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #34 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #34 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #34 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #34 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #34 wear compensation
Tool #35 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #35 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #35 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #35 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #35 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #35 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #35 wear compensation
Tool #36 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #36 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #36 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #36 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #36 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #36 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #36 wear compensation
Tool #37 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #37 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #37 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #37 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #37 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #37 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #37 wear compensation
Tool #38 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #38 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #38 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #38 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #38 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #38 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #38 wear compensation
Tool #39 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #39 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #39 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #39 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #39 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #39 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #39 wear compensation
Tool #40 radius wear compensation
X-axis, Tool #40 wear compensation
Y-axis, Tool #40 wear compensation
Z-axis, Tool #40 wear compensation
A-axis, Tool #40 wear compensation
B-axis, Tool #40 wear compensation
C-axis, Tool #40 wear compensation
Tool-tip #1 radius compensation
4 - 23
Setting
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM
No.
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
Factory
Default
Setting
Unit
Description
Tool-tip #2 radius compensation
Tool-tip #3 radius compensation
Tool-tip #4 radius compensation
Tool-tip #5 radius compensation
Tool-tip #6 radius compensation
Tool-tip #7 radius compensation
Tool-tip #8 radius compensation
Tool-tip #9 radius compensation
Tool-tip #10 radius compensation
Tool-tip #11 radius compensation
Tool-tip #12 radius compensation
Tool-tip #13 radius compensation
Tool-tip #14 radius compensation
Tool-tip #15 radius compensation
Tool-tip #16 radius compensation
Tool-tip #17 radius compensation
Tool-tip #18 radius compensation
Tool-tip #19 radius compensation
Tool-tip #20 radius compensation
Tool-tip #21 radius compensation
Tool-tip #22 radius compensation
Tool-tip #23 radius compensation
Tool-tip #24 radius compensation
Tool-tip #25 radius compensation
Tool-tip #26 radius compensation
Tool-tip #27 radius compensation
Tool-tip #28 radius compensation
Tool-tip #29 radius compensation
Tool-tip #30 radius compensation
Tool-tip #31 radius compensation
Tool-tip #32 radius compensation
Tool-tip #33 radius compensation
Tool-tip #34 radius compensation
Tool-tip #35 radius compensation
Tool-tip #36 radius compensation
Tool-tip #37 radius compensation
Tool-tip #38 radius compensation
Tool-tip #39 radius compensation
Tool-tip #40 radius compensation
PS: Press PAGEÇ or PAGEÈ once will change twelve items.
4 - 24
Setting
4 MCM Parameters
4.2
Description of MCM Machine Constants
The decimal format for MCM data in this section is based on 4/3 format.
MCM #1~#36 are for G54~G59 work coordinates data. The setting value is the
distance between the origin of each work coordinate system and the machine
HOME position. All input data have the same format and unit as shown below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
G54 (1st) Work Coordinate, X-axis.
G54 (1st) Work Coordinate, Y-axis.
G54 (1st) Work Coordinate, Z-axis.
G54 (1st) Work Coordinate, A-axis.
G54 (1st) Work Coordinate, B-axis.
G54 (1st) Work Coordinate, C-axis.
G54 (1st) Work Coordinate, U-axis.
G54 (1st) Work Coordinate, V-axis.
G54 (1st) Work Coordinate, W-axis.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: mm (Default=0.000)
MCM# 10~20
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
G55 (2nd) Work Coordinate, X-axis.
G55 (2nd) Work Coordinate, Y-axis.
G55 (2nd) Work Coordinate, Z-axis.
G55 (2nd) Work Coordinate, A-axis.
G55 (2nd) Work Coordinate, B-axis.
G55 (2nd) Work Coordinate, C-axis.
G55 (2nd) Work Coordinate, U-axis.
G55 (2nd) Work Coordinate, V-axis.
G55 (2nd) Work Coordinate, W-axis.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: mm (Default=0.000)
MCM# 30~40
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
System Reserved!
System Reserved!
G56 (3rd) Work Coordinate, X-axis.
G56 (3rd) Work Coordinate, Y-axis.
G56 (3rd) Work Coordinate, Z-axis.
G56 (3rd) Work Coordinate, A-axis.
G56 (3rd) Work Coordinate, B-axis.
G56 (3rd) Work Coordinate, C-axis.
G56 (3rd) Work Coordinate, U-axis.
G56 (3rd) Work Coordinate, V-axis.
G56 (3rd) Work Coordinate, W-axis.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: mm (Default=0.000)
MCM# 50~60
System Reserved!
MCM# 61~69
MCM# 70~80
G57 (4th) Work Coordinate.
System Reserved!
4 - 25
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM# 81~89 G58 (5th) Work Coordinate.
MCM# 90~100 System Reserved!
MCM# 101~109 G59 (6th) Work Coordinate.
MCM# 110~120 System Reserved!
MCM Parameters 121~160 are used for setting the coordinates of the reference
point. Its value is the mechanical coordinates of the reference point relative to
the mechanical origin.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
129.
G28 1st Reference Point Data, X-axis.
G28 1st Reference Point Data, Y-axis.
G28 1st Reference Point Data, Z-axis.
G28 1st Reference Point Data, A-axis.
G28 1st Reference Point Data, B-axis.
G28 1st Reference Point Data, C-axis.
G28 1st Reference Point Data, U-axis.
G28 1st Reference Point Data, V-axis.
G28 1st Reference Point Data, W-axis.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: mm (Default=0.000)
MCM# 130~140 System Reserved!
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
G30 2st Reference Point Data, X-axis.
G30 2st Reference Point Data, Y-axis.
G30 2st Reference Point Data, Z-axis.
G30 2st Reference Point Data, A-axis.
G30 2st Reference Point Data, B-axis.
G30 2st Reference Point Data, C-axis.
G30 2st Reference Point Data, U-axis.
G30 2st Reference Point Data, V-axis.
G30 2st Reference Point Data, W-axis.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: mm (Default=0.000)
MCM# 150~160 System Reserved!
161.
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.
169.
Backlash Compensation (G01), X-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G01), Y-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G01), Z-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G01), A-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G01), B-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G01), C-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G01), U-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G01), V-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G01), W-axis.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: pulse (Default=0) Range:0~9.9999
MCM# 170~180 System Reserved!
4 - 26
4 MCM Parameters
181.
182.
183.
184.
185.
186.
187.
188.
189.
Backlash Compensation (G00), X-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G00), Y-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G00), Z-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G00), A-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G00), B-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G00), C-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G00), U-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G00), V-axis.
Backlash Compensation (G00), W-axis.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: pulse (Default=0) Range:0~9.9999
MCM# 170~200 System Reserved!
201.
202.
203.
204.
205.
206.
207.
208.
209.
Jog Speed, X-axis.
Jog Speed, Y-axis.
Jog Speed, Z-axis.
Jog Speed, A-axis.
Jog Speed, B-axis.
Jog Speed, C-axis.
Jog Speed, U-axis.
Jog Speed, V-axis.
Jog Speed, W-axis.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: mm/min (Default=1000)
MCM# 210~220 System Reserved!
221.
222.
223.
224.
225.
226.
227.
228.
229.
Traverse Speed Limit, X-axis.
Traverse Speed Limit, Y-axis.
Traverse Speed Limit, Z-axis.
Traverse Speed Limit, A-axis.
Traverse Speed Limit, B-axis.
Traverse Speed Limit, C-axis.
Traverse Speed Limit, U-axis.
Traverse Speed Limit, V-axis.
Traverse Speed Limit, W-axis.
Format:□□□□□,Unit: mm/min
(Default=10000)
Note : The format is only for integer.
The traverse speed limit can be calculated from the following equation:
Fmax = 0.95 * RPM * Pitch * GR
RPM : The ratio. rpm of servo motor
Pitch : The pitch of the ball-screw
GR : Gear ratio of ball-screw/motor
Ex: Max. rpm = 3000 rpm for X-axis,
Pitch = 5 mm/rev,
Ratio = 5/1
Fmax = 0.95 * 3000 * 5 / 5 = 2850 mm/min
4 - 27
Gear
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Therefore, it is recommended to set MCM #148=2850.
MCM# 230~240 System Reserved!
241.
242.
243.
244.
245.
246.
247.
248.
249.
250.
251.
252.
253.
254.
255.
256.
257.
258.
Denominator of Machine Resolution, X-axis.
Numerator of Machine Resolution, X-axis.
Denominator of Machine Resolution, Y-axis.
Numerator of Machine Resolution, Y-axis.
Denominator of Machine Resolution, Z-axis.
Numerator of Machine Resolution, Z-axis
Denominator of Machine Resolution, A-axis.
Numerator of Machine Resolution, A-axis
Denominator of Machine Resolution, B-axis.
Numerator of Machine Resolution, B-axis
Denominator of Machine Resolution, C-axis.
Numerator of Machine Resolution, C-axis
Denominator of Machine Resolution, U-axis.
Numerator of Machine Resolution, U-axis
Denominator of Machine Resolution, V-axis.
Numerator of Machine Resolution, V-axis
Denominator of Machine Resolution, W-axis.
Numerator of Machine Resolution, W-axis
Format:□.□□□,(Default=100)
Denominator (D) = pulses/rev for the encoder on motor.
Numerator (N) = pitch length (mm/rev) of the ball-screw.
Gear Ratio (GR) = Tooth No. on ball-screw / Tooth No. on motor.
Pulse Multiplication Factor (MF) = MCM #416~#469.
Machine Resolution =
(Pitch of Ball - screw)
1
*
(Encoder Pulse) * (MF) GR
Ex1: X-axis as linear axis (MCM #781=0), pitch = 5 mm = 5000 µm
Encoder = 2500 pulses, MCM #461 = 4, and GR = 5 (motor rotates 5
times while ball-screw rotates once)
Machine resolution = 5000/(2500 × 4)/5 = 5000/50000 = 1/10 = 0.1
µm/pulse
Therefore, the setting value for MCM #118 (D) and #119 (N) can be
set as or the same ratio of N/D such as. They are all correct.
(1) D=50000, N=5000
(2) D=10, N=1 (3) D=100, N=10
Ex2: Y-axis as rotating axis (MCM #782=1), Angle = 360.000 deg/circle
Encoder = 2500 pulses, MCM #161 = 4, and GR = 5 (motor rotates 5
times while ball-screw rotates once)
Machine resolution = 360000/(2500 × 4)/5 = 360000/50000 = 36/5
=72/10
4 - 28
4 MCM Parameters
Therefore, the setting value for MCM #120 (D) and #121 (N) can be
one of the three combinations. They are all correct.
(1) D=5, N=36 (2) D=10, N=72 (3) D=50000, N=360000
Ex 3 (Position Linear Axis):
The X-axis is an ordinary linear axis (MCM#781= 0) with the guide screw pitch =
5.000 mm.
When the motor rotates one turn, 10000 pulses will be generated.
Gear ratio is 5:1 (When the servo motor rotates 5 turns, the guide screw rotates
1 turn.)
5000
Resolution =
=
1
10
1
×
10000
5
X-axis resolution: denominator setting value (MCM#241)= 10
X-axis resolution: numerator setting value (MCM#242)= 1
Ex 4 (Position type rotational axis):
The Y-axis is a rotational axis (MCM#782 = 1). The angle for rotating 1 turn =
360.000 (degree)
One turn of the motor will generate 10000 pulses.
Gear ratio is 5:1 (When the servo motor rotates 5 turns, the Y-axis rotates 1
turn.)
360000
Resolution =
=
10000
×
1
5
36
5
Y-axis resolution: denominator setting value (MCM#243) = 5
Y-axis resolution: numerator setting value (MCM#244) = 36
Note 1: When the resolution <1/20, the motor may have the problem of
not able to reach its maximum rotation speed.
Note 2: When the resolution <1/100, the software travel limit should be
within the following range:
-9999999 ~ 999999, otherwise an error message may occur which
cannot be released.
Ex:
For MCM#241=400 and MCM#242=2, when the X-axis resolution is
smaller than 1/100, the setting values of the software travel limit for the
4 - 29
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
X-axis: Parameter 581 should be less than 9999999 and Parameter
601 should be greater than -999999.
MCM# 259~280 System Reserved!
281.
282.
283.
284.
285.
286.
287.
288.
289.
Home Direction for Tool, X-axis.
Home Direction for Tool, Y-axis.
Home Direction for Tool, Z-axis.
Home Direction for Tool, A-axis.
Home Direction for Tool, B-axis.
Home Direction for Tool, C-axis.
Home Direction for Tool, U-axis.
Home Direction for Tool, V-axis.
Home Direction for Tool, W-axis.
Format:□,(Default=0)
Setting = 0, Tool returning to HOME in the positive direction.
Setting = 1, Tool returning to HOME in the negative direction
MCM# 290~300 System Reserved!
301.
302.
303.
304.
305.
306.
307.
308.
309.
Home Speed When Tool Going to Home, X-axis.
Home Speed When Tool Going to Home, Y-axis.
Home Speed When Tool Going to Home, Z-axis.
Home Speed When Tool Going to Home, A-axis.
Home Speed When Tool Going to Home, B-axis.
Home Speed When Tool Going to Home, C-axis.
Home Speed When Tool Going to Home, U-axis
Home Speed When Tool Going to Home, V-axis
Home Speed When Tool Going to Home, W-axis
Format:□□□□,Unit: mm/min (Default=2500)
MCM# 310~320 System Reserved!
321.
322.
323.
324.
325.
326.
327.
328.
329.
Home Grid Speed When Tool Going to Home, X-axis.
Home Grid Speed When Tool Going to Home, Y-axis.
Home Grid Speed When Tool Going to Home, Z-axis.
Home Grid Speed When Tool Going to Home, A-axis.
Home Grid Speed When Tool Going to Home, B-axis.
Home Grid Speed When Tool Going to Home, C-axis.
Home Grid Speed When Tool Going to Home, U-axis.
Home Grid Speed When Tool Going to Home, V-axis.
Home Grid Speed When Tool Going to Home, W-axis.
Format:□□□□,Unit: mm/min (Default=40)
MCM# 330~340 System Reserved!
341. The direction that servo motor search the Grid when X-axis going back to
HOME.
4 - 30
4 MCM Parameters
342. The direction that servo motor search the Grid when Y-axis going back to
HOME.
343. The direction that servo motor search the Grid when Z-axis going back to
HOME.
344. The direction that servo motor search the Grid when A-axis going back to
HOME.
345. The direction that servo motor search the Grid when B-axis going back to
HOME.
346. The direction that servo motor search the Grid when C-axis going back to
HOME.
347. The direction that servo motor search the Grid when U-axis going back to
HOME.
348. The direction that servo motor search the Grid when V-axis going back to
HOME.
349. The direction that servo motor search the Grid when W-axis going back to
HOME.
Format:□,(Default=0)
EX:
When MCM#341= 0, the 2nd and 3rd direction is the same with 1st
MCM#341= 1, the 2nd is the same with 1st .
MCM#341= 128, the 2nd direction is opposite to 1st .
MCM#341= 256, the 2nd and 3rd direction is opposite to 1st .
Set the moving speed when the tool, after having touched the HOME limit
switch, is searching for the encoder grid signal during HOME execution.
HUST H6C-M CNC has three (3) different speeds when you execute
HOME function as shown by Fig 7.2.
Speed 1: The motor accelerates to Speed 1 and its maximum speed is
determined by the settings of MCM #301 ~ #309, (X, Y, Z, A, B,
C, U, V, W-axis) and the direction by MCM #281 ~ #289. When
tool touches the home limit switch, it starts deceleration to a
stop.
Speed 2: The motor accelerates again to speed 2 and its maximum
speed is equal to 1/4 of Speed 1 and the direction is by MCM
#341~#349. When tool starts leaving the home limit switch, it
starts deceleration to a stop.
Speed 3: The motor accelerates to speed 3 and its maximum speed is
determined by the settings of MCM #321~#329 and the
direction by MCM #341~#349. Once the encoder grid index is
found, motor decelerates to a stop. This is the HOME position.
Note that the length of the Home limit switch should be longer than the
distance for the deceleration of Speed 1. Otherwise, serious error may
result. The equation to calculate the length of the Home limit switch is
Length of Home Limit Switch (mm) ≥
4 - 31
FDCOM * ACC
60000
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
FDCOM = Speed 1, in mm/min. (MCM #301~ #309)
ACC
= Time for acceleration/deceleration, in ms. (MCM #505)
60000 = 60 seconds = 60 * 1000 milliseconds
When the C-bit C063=1 in PLC program, it commands the controller to do
homing operation. Do homing operation for X-axis if R232=1, do Y-axis if
R232=2, do Z –axis if R232=4 , do A–axis if R232=8 and do four axes
simultaneously if R232=15.
Ex: FDCOM = 3000.00 mm/min, and ACC = 100 ms
Length of Home Limit Switch = 3000 * 100 / 60000 = 5 mm
Speed:MCM #136~ #139
Touch the LIMIT SWITCH
Direction:MCM#130~ #133
C064=1、C065=1、C066=1
1st Section Speed
Speed
2
nd
3rd
Leave the LIMIT SWITCH
C064=0、C065=0、C066=0
Speed:MCM#136~ #139 × 1/4
Direction:MCM#231~ #234= 256
INDEX of finding Encoder
Speed:MCM#142~ #145
Direction:MCM#231~ #234= 256
Tool Position
Fig 7.2 (A) Homing Speed and Direction of finding(GRID)
Speed:MCM #136~ #139
Direction:MCM#130~ #133
Speed
Touch the LIMIT SWITCH
C064=1、C065=1、C066=1
1st Section Speed
3rd
INDEX of finding Encoder
Speed:MCM#142~ #145
Direction:MCM#231~ #234= 128
2nd
Tool Position
Leave the LIMIT SWITCH
C064=0、C065=0、C066=0
Speed:MCM#136~ #139 × 1/4
Direction:MCM#231~ #234= 128
Fig 7.2 (B) Homing Speed and Direction of finding(GRID)
4 - 32
4 MCM Parameters
Speed:MCM #136~ #139
Direction:MCM#130~ #133
Touch the LIMIT SWITCH
C064=1、C065=1、C066=1
Speed
1st Section Speed
2nd
Leave the LIMIT SWITCH
C064=0、C065=0、C066=0
Speed:MCM#136~ #139 × 1/4
Direction:MCM#231~ #234= 1
3rd
Tool Position
INDEX of finding Encoder
Speed:MCM#142~ #145
Direction:MCM#231~ #234= 1
Fig 7-2(C) Homing Speed and Direction of finding(GRID)
Speed:MCM #136~ #139
Direction:MCM#130~ #133
Speed
Touch the LIMIT SWITCH
C064=1、C065=1、C066=1
st
1 Section Speed
3rd
2nd
INDEX of finding Encoder
Speed:MCM#142~ #145
Direction:MCM#231~ #234= 0
Tool Position
Leave the LIMIT SWITCH
C064=0、C065=0、C066=0
Speed:MCM#136~ #139 × 1/4
Direction:MCM#231~ #234= 0
Fig 7-2(D) Homing Speed and Direction of finding(GRID)
MCM# 350~360 System Reserved!
361.
362.
363.
364.
365.
366.
367.
368.
369.
Setting the X-Home grid setting.
Setting the Y-Home grid setting.
Setting the Z-Home grid setting.
Setting the A-Home grid setting.
Setting the B-Home grid setting.
Setting the C-Home grid setting.
Setting the U-Home grid setting.
Setting the V-Home grid setting.
Setting the W-Home grid setting.
Format=□□□□.□□□ (Default=0.000), unit: mm
Leaving from the origin switch signal, deviating from the above set
distance, and then you can start to execute the Homing process (third
section) to locate the motor Gird signal.
4 - 33
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
MCM# 370~380 System Reserved!
381.
382.
383.
384.
385.
386.
387.
388.
389.
Home-Shift Data, X-axis.
Home-Shift Data, Y-axis.
Home-Shift Data, Z-axis.
Home-Shift Data, A-axis.
Home-Shift Data, B-axis.
Home-Shift Data, C-axis.
Home-Shift Data, U-axis.
Home-Shift Data, V-axis.
Home-Shift Data, W-axis.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: mm/min (Default=0.000)
Set the amount of coordinate shift for HOME location (or machine origin).
With these settings, the machine coordinate will be shifted by the same
amount when you execute "Home". If home shift data are zero for all axes,
the machine coordinate after "Home" operation will be zero also. Note that
the work coordinate will be shifted by the same amount.
MCM# 390~400 System Reserved!
401. The distance that servo motor search the Grid when X-axis going back to
HOME.
402. The distance that servo motor search the Grid when Y-axis going back to
HOME.
403. The distance that servo motor search the Grid when Z-axis going back to
HOME.
404. The distance that servo motor search the Grid when A-axis going back to
HOME.
405. The distance that servo motor search the Grid when B-axis going back to
HOME.
406. The distance that servo motor search the Grid when C-axis going back to
HOME.
407. The distance that servo motor search the Grid when U-axis going back to
HOME.
408. The distance that servo motor search the Grid when V-axis going back to
HOME.
409. The distance that servo motor search the Grid when W-axis going back to
HOME.
Format=□□□□.□□□ (Default 1000.000)
The distance’s maximum when servo motor searching the Grid signal:
EX:
The servo motor of X-axis turns 3/4 round = 5.000 mm, MCM# 401 =
5.200
The servo motor of Y-axis turns 3/4 round = 5.000 mm, MCM# 402 =
5.200
The servo motor of Z-axis turns 3/4 round = 5.000 mm, MCM# 403 =
5.200
4 - 34
4 MCM Parameters
The servo motor of A-axis turns 3/4 round = 5.000 mm, MCM# 404 =
5.200
The servo motor of B-axis turns 3/4 round = 5.000 mm, MCM# 405 =
5.200
The servo motor of C-axis turns 3/4 round = 5.000 mm, MCM# 406 =
5.200
※ If it exceeds the range and the motor can not find the Grid still. ERR15 will
be shown up.
MCM# 410~420 System Reserved!
421.
422.
423.
424.
425.
426.
427.
428.
X-axis origin switch (+: N.O node; -: N.C node)
Y -axis origin switch (+: N.O node; -: N.C node)
Z -axis origin switch (+: N.O node; -: N.C node)
A-axis origin switch (+: N.O node; -: N.C node)
B -axis origin switch (+: N.O node; -: N.C node)
C-axis origin switch (+: N.O node; -: N.C node)
U-axis origin switch (+: N.O node; -: N.C node
V-axis origin switch (+: N.O node; -: N.C node
429. W-axis origin switch (+: N.O node; -: N.C node
Example: MCM 421=5
Set I5 to be the X-axis origin signal with format NO
MCM 425=-6
Set I6 to be the A-axis origin signal with format NC
※ Default = 0, Funcitons are inactive, ≠ 0, Functions are active.
※If a homing process with C64-69 is planned in PLC, it shall be
based on the activity set by PLC.
MCM# 430~440 System Reserved!
441.
442.
443.
444.
445.
446.
447.
448.
449.
Direction of Motor Rotation, X-axis.
Direction of Motor Rotation, Y-axis.
Direction of Motor Rotation, Z-axis.
Direction of Motor Rotation, A-axis.
Direction of Motor Rotation, B-axis.
Direction of Motor Rotation, C-axis.
Direction of Motor Rotation, U-axis.
Direction of Motor Rotation, V-axis.
Direction of Motor Rotation, W-axis.
Format:□,(Default=0)
Setting = 0, Motor rotates in the positive direction. (CW)
Setting = 1, Motor rotates in the negative direction. (CCW)
4 - 35
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
This MCM can be used to reverse the direction of motor rotation if desired.
So you don’t have to worry about the direction of rotation when installing
motor. These parameters will affect the direction of HOME position
IMPORTANT: Motor Divergence
Due to the variations in circuit design of the servo drivers that are
available from the market, the proper electrical connections from servo
encoder to the driver, then to the CNC controller may vary. If the
connections do not match properly, the motor RPM may become
divergent (Rotate @ HIGH RPM) and damage to the machine may result.
For this reason, HUST strongly suggest separate the servo motor and the
machine before you are 100% sure the direction of the motor rotation. If a
motor divergence occurs, please inter-change the connections of (A and
B phase) and (A- and B- phase) on the driver side.
(This statement has nothing to do with MCM #154~ #157 but it’s very
important when connecting electrical motor.)
If a motor divergence occurs, please inter-change the connections of (A
and B phase) and (A- and B- phase) on the driver side.
4 - 36
4 MCM Parameters
EX:
AXIS
CW+
CWCCW+
CCWVCC-CN
GRD-(Z-)
TOG
VCOM
SVO+
SVOAA+
B+
BGND-CN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Servo
Signal
Location Command -10 ~ +10V
9
10
SERVO ON(Internal Control)
11
12
13
14
15
0V
GND
Fig 7.3
MCM# 450~460 System Reserved!
461.
462.
463.
464.
465.
466.
467.
468.
469.
Encoder Multiplication Factor, X-axis.
Encoder Multiplication Factor, Y-axis.
Encoder Multiplication Factor, Z-axis.
Encoder Multiplication Factor, A-axis.
Encoder Multiplication Factor, B-axis.
Encoder Multiplication Factor, C-axis.
Encoder Multiplication Factor, U-axis.
Encoder Multiplication Factor, V-axis.
Encoder Multiplication Factor, W-axis.
Format:□,(Default=4)
Only one the following 3 numbers:
Setting = 1, Encoder pulse number is multiplied by 1.
Setting = 2, Encoder pulse number is multiplied by 2.
Setting = 4, Encoder pulse number is multiplied by 4.
Note:
The setting of multiplication is highly relative with machine’s rigidity. If a motor
divergence occurs too heavily, it means that the rigidity is too big. And then it
can be improved by lowering the multiplication.
Ex: If factor = 2 for MCM #161 and the encoder resolution is 2000
pulses/rev,
then the feed-back signals = 2000 * 2 = 4000 pulses/rev for Y-axis.
MCM# 470~480 System Reserved!
4 - 37
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
481.
482.
483.
484.
485.
486.
487.
488.
489.
X-axis impulse command width adjustment.
Y-axis impulse command width adjustment.
Z-axis impulse command width adjustment.
A-axis impulse command width adjustment.
B-axis impulse command width adjustment.
C-axis impulse command width adjustment.
U-axis impulse command width adjustment.
V-axis impulse command width adjustment.
W-axis impulse command width adjustment.
Format=□□ (Default=4)
Setting range 1~63。
Used to adjust each axial impulse command width
If the pulse frequency from H6C-M controller is 1Hz, then the cycle time of
a pulse is 0.25us. If it is required to extend the pulse cycle time, it can be
achieved through adjust ment of the impulse width.
For example:
If MCM 486=4, the impulse cycle time in the X-axis direction is
4*0.25=1.5us and the frequency is 625KHz.
MCM# 490~500 System Reserved!
501. Master/Slave Mode Setting
Format:□.□□□,(Default=0)
Setting = 0, CNC mode, Master/Slave mode NOT set.
= 1, X-axis as master axis, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, W-axis as slave
axes.
= 2, Y-axis as master axis, X, Z, A, B, C, U, V, W -axis as slave
axes.
= 3, Z-axis as master axis, X, Y, A, B, C, U, V, W -axis as slave
axes.
= 4, A-axis as master axis, X, Y, Z, B, C, U, V, W -axis as slave
axes.
= 5, B-axis as master axis, X, Y, Z, A, C, U, V, W -axis as slave
axes.
= 6, C-axis as master axis, X, Y, Z, A, B, U, V, W -axis as slave
axes.
= 7, U-axis as master axis, X, Y, Z, A, B, C, V, W -axis as slave
axes.
= 8, V-axis as master axis, X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, W -axis as slave
axes.
= 9, W-axis as master axis, X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V -axis as slave
axes.
= 256, Round Corner Non-stop Operation
502. Type of Motor Acceleration/Deceleration
Format:□,(Default=0)
4 - 38
4 MCM Parameters
Setting = 0, exponential type.
Setting = 1, Linear type.
Setting = 2, "S" curve.
503. Home command mode setting.
BIT0 = 0 X axis find Home grid available, =1 X axis no need to find Home grid.
BIT1 = 0 Y axis find Home grid available, =1 Y axis no need to find Home grid.
BIT2 = 0 Z axis find Home grid available, =1 Z axis no need to find Home grid.
BIT3 = 0 A axis find Home grid available, =1 A axis no need to find Home grid.
BIT4 = 0 B axis find Home grid available, =1 B axis no need to find Home grid.
BIT5 = 0 C axis find Home grid available, =1 C axis no need to find Home grid.
BIT6 = 0 U axis find Home grid available, =1 U axis no need to find Home grid.
BIT7 = 0 V axis find Home grid available, =1 V axis no need to find Home grid.
BIT8 = 0 W axis find Home grid available, =1 W axis no need to find Home grid.
504. Servo Motor Acceleration/Deceleration Time, G00.
Format:□□□,Unit: millisecond
(Default=100)
Setting Range: 4 ~ 512 millisecond
505. Servo Motor Acceleration/Deceleration Time (T), G01.
Format:□□□,Unit: millisecond
(Default=100)
Setting Range: 10 ~ 1024 millisecond.
100 milliseconds is the recommended setting for both G00 and G01.
If MCM #502 setting = 0, type of accel./decel. for G01 = exponential
If MCM #502 setting = 1, type of accel./decel. for G01 = Linear.
If MCM #502 setting = 2, type of acceleration/deceleration for G01 = "S"
curve. In this case, the actual acceleration/deceleration time is twice the
setting value.
506. Acceleration/Deceleration Time for G99 Mode.
Format:□□□,Unit: Millisecond
(Default=100)
Setting Range: 4 ~ 1024 ms.
507. Set the spindle Acceleration/Deceleration time in master mode.
Format:□□□□,(Default=0)
Unit: Millisecond
508. Spindle Encoder Pulse Per Revolution
Format:□□□□,Unit: Pulse/rev
(Default=4096)
509. Set Spindle Motor RPM When Vcmd = 10 Volt.
Format:□□□□,Unit: RPM
(Default=3000)
510. Spindle voltage command 0V output balance adjustment (open circuit).
511. Spindle voltage command slope correction (open circuit).
512. Spindle RPM correction (based on feedback from the encoder).
4 - 39
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
513. Starting Number for Auto Generation of Program Block Number.
Format:S= □,(Default=0)
514. Increment for Auto-generation of Program Block Number.
Format:D= □,(Default=0)
515. If D = 0, the program block number of a single program block will not be
generated automatically.
In the Edit or Teach mode, the block number of a single block can be
automatically generated by simply press the INSERT key. If the RESET
key is pressed, the block number of a single block will be renumbered
according to the setting values in Parameters 514 and 515.
Ex: S = 0 , D = 5
The program block number will be generated in the sequence:
5,10,15,20,25 …
516. Denominator of Feed-rate Multiplication Factor for MPG Test.
517. Numerator of Feed-rate Multiplication Factor for MPG Test.
Format:□□□□□,(Default=100)
Note: If the MPG rotation speed is not proper, it can be adjusted by
MCM#516, #517. The two items are up to 5 units and it must be integer.
They also can not set as zero.
518. Handwheel direction
Format=□ (Default= 0).
If it is necessary to change the relation between the current handwheel
rotational direction and the axial displacement direction, it can be
achieved by setting the value to 0 or 1.
It can be adjusted separately the corresponding axial direction bit 0 =x
bit 1 =y....
Example: BIT 0=1 The X-axis handwheel command is reverse, but other
axes remain at the default.
519. Set Acceleration / Deceleration Time for MPG
Format=□□□, (Default = 64), Unit: milliseconds
Setting Range: 4~512 ms.
The motor acceleration / deceleration time is equal to MCM #519 when
MPG hand-wheel is used in JOG mode.
520. RS232C Baud Rate.
Format:□□□□,(Default = 38400)
4 - 40
4 MCM Parameters
Set RS232C communication speed. Choose from, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, 115200 Speed rate 38400 stands for 38400 bits per second.
In addition, use the following settings for your PC:
Parity
-- Even
Stop Bits -- 2 bits
Data Bits – 7 bits
521. Flag to Save the Data of R000~R199 in PLC when power-off.
Format:□,(Default=0)
Setting = 0,
NOT to save.
Setting = 256, Save R000~R199 data.
522. Servo Error Count
Format:□,(Default=0)
When executing locating operation, the controller has sent out the voltage
command, but the motor maybe fall behind some distance. This
parameter is used to set that the controller could execute next operation
or not according to the setting range of pulse
Set MCM#522 = 0 for generating 4096 pulses.
Set MCM#522 ≠ 0 for user defined value.
523. Radius / diameter programming mode
Format=□ (Default = 0)
0: Radius programming
1: Diameter programming
524. METRIC/INCH Mode Selection (default = 0)
Format:□□□,(Default = 0)
Setting = 0, Measurement in METRIC unit.
Setting = 1, Measurement in INCH unit.
525. Error in Circular Cutting
Format:□□□□,(Default = 1)
Range:1 ~ 32
In circular cutting, the ideal cutting path is a circular arc, but the actual
motor path is along the arc cord (a straight line). Therefore, there is a
cutting error as shown in the figure below.
4 - 41
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
The less the setting set; the better the
circular arc cut.
Cutting Error
Fig 7.4
This parameter enables the user to adjust acceptable error. The smaller is
the setting (=1, the best), the better the circular cutting result. However,
the setting should not be too small to the point that it’s not able to drive the
motor.
526. 6-axis parameter settings in pulse type
Format =□□□□, Default: 0
Setting =0:
Setting =1:
Setting =2:
pulse + direction
+/- pulse
in the format of Phase A or B
527. Setting the G01 speed value at booting
After booting, in executing the program or MDI command, if you have not
used the F command yet, nor the current single block has designated the
F value, then use the MCM 527 value as the F value of the current single
block.
528. Setting the tool compensation direction
Format=□ (Default=0)
0:HUST
1:FANUC
Tool-wear compensation direction - HUST: same direction; FANUC:
reverse direction.
529. G00 Linear accel./decel. Time, for ”S” curve
Format=□ (Default=100) in unit of millisecond (msec).
Setting range 4~512 ms.
530. G31 input motion stop at hardware
Format=□ (Default=0)
Using the bit pattern, the corresponding axes for the G31 hardware stop
feature can be configured.
Description:
MCM530=0, the hardware G31 clear feature is cancelled.
MCM530=1, Bit0 = 1, the hardware stop for the X-axis is activated.
4 - 42
4 MCM Parameters
MCM530=2, Bit1 = 1, the hardware stop for the Y-axis is activated.
MCM530=4, Bit2 = 1, the hardware stop for the Z-axis is activated.
MCM530=8, Bit3 = 1, the hardware stop for the A-axis is activated.
MCM530=16, Bit4 = 1, the hardware stop for the B-axis is activated.
MCM530=32, Bit5 = 1, the hardware stop for the C-axis is activated.
MCM530=64, Bit6 = 1, the hardware stop for the U-axis is activated.
MCM530=128, Bit7 = 1, the hardware stop for the V-axis is activated.
MCM530=256, Bit8 = 1, the hardware stop for the W-axis is activated.
531. Setting the format
Format=□ (Default=0)
=0 Standard
=1 Variable automatically added with a decimal point
When setting the parameter, the user does not need to input the
decimal point. The controller will automatically add the decimal point
for the user.
=2 Line editing
=4 Automatically added with a decimal point in programming
In programming, the controller will automatically add the decimal point
for the user.
532. In the milling mode, set the gap for drill to withdraw.
Format=□. □□□ (Default= 2.000) unit:mm
533. Setting the test following count
Format=□□□□□□□ (Default= 0)
With use of parameter Item No.534
534. Testing the axial setting of the servo following error function
Format=□□□ (Default = 0)
Set the testing corresponding to the axis with Bit
Description:
When MCM534=1 and Bit0 = 1, test the X-axus.
When MCM534=2 and Bit1 = 1, test the Y-axis.
When MCM534=4 and Bit2 = 1, test the Z-axis.
When MCM534=8 and Bit3 = 1, test the A-axis.
When MCM534=16 and Bit4 = 1, test the B-axis.
When MCM534=32 and Bit5 = 1, test the C-axis.
When MCM534=64 and Bit6 = 1, test the U-axis.
When MCM534=128 and Bit7 = 1, test the V-axis.
When MCM534=256 and Bit8 = 1, test the W-axis.
When MCM534=511, i.e. Bit0 ~ Bit8= 1, then test X/Y/Z/A/B/C/U/V/Waxes at the same time.
4 - 43
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Caution: For HUST H6C-M controller, if the servo motor used is a
voltage command type, it is necessary to set testing the following
error function ( not applicable for the impulse command type).
The controller will compare the actual feedback difference of the servo
motor with the setting of the parameter Item No 533. If the controller
detects that the axis has been set beyond the range, the system will
display an error message.
Example: When the parameter Item No 533= 4096, the parameter Item No
534=1, and
The actual motor following error
>
4096 (Parameter Item No 533), it will generate ERROR 02 X
535. Controller ID number
Control connection of multiple units with PC. Currently, the function is
reserved.
536. Setting the minimum slope of the Auto Teach function
Format=□□□□□.□□ (Default= 0)
Setting range: +360.00 ~ -360.00
537. Setting the first point distance of the Auto Teach function.
Format=□□□□.□□□ (Default= 0)
538. G41 and G42 Handling type
Format=□ (Default 0)
When the setting value =0, an error is displayed, the interference problem
is not handelled, and the motion is stopped.
=1 Automactilly handle the interference problem.
=2 The error message is not displayed and the interference problem is
not handeled.
539. System Reserved
540. Adjustment of the feedback direction for the axes
Format=□□□ (Default 0)
Set the corresponding axes by the bit pattern.
Description:
If MCM540=1, Bit0 = 1, the feedback direction is reverse for the X-axis.
If MCM540=2, Bit1 = 1, the feedback direction is reverse for the Y-axis.
If MCM540=4, Bit2 = 1, the feedback direction is reverse for the Z-axis.
If MCM540=8, Bit3 = 1, the feedback direction is reverse for the A-axis.
If MCM540=16, Bit4 = 1, the feedback direction is reverse for the B-axis.
If MCM540=32, Bit5 = 1, the feedback direction is reverse for the C-axis.
4 - 44
4 MCM Parameters
If MCM540=64, Bit6 = 1, the feedback direction is reverse for the U-axis.
If MCM540=128, Bit7 = 1, the feedback direction is reverse for the V-axis.
If MCM540=256, Bit8 = 1, the feedback direction is reverse for the W-axis.
541. Arc type
Format=□ (Default 0)
Setting =0 arc cord height control.
=1 arc cord length control.
=2 system internal automatic control (500 sections/sec).
MCM# 542~560 System Reserved!
561.
562.
563.
564.
565.
566.
567.
568.
569.
“S” curve accel./decel. profile setting for the X-axis.
“S” curve accel./decel. profile setting for the Y-axis.
“S” curve accel./decel. profile setting for the Z-axis.
“S” curve accel./decel. profile setting for the A-axis.
“S” curve accel./decel. profile setting for the B-axis.
“S” curve accel./decel. profile setting for the C-axis.
“S” curve accel./decel. profile setting for the U-axis.
“S” curve accel./decel. profile setting for the V-axis.
“S” curve accel./decel. profile setting for the W-axis.
When R209 Bit30=1, the “S” curve accel./decel. profile settings can be
configured independently.
MCM# 570~580 System Reserved!
581.
582.
583.
584.
585.
586.
587.
588.
589.
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, X-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, Y-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, Z-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, A-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, B-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, C-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, U-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, V-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, W-axis. (Group 1)
Format:□□□□□□□,Unit: mm/min (Default=9999.999)
Set the software over-travel (OT) limit in the positive (+) direction, the
setting value is equal to the distance from positive OT location to the
machine origin (HOME).
MCM# 590~600 System Reserved!
601. Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, X-axis. (Group 1)
602. Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, Y-axis. (Group 1)
603. Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, Z-axis. (Group 1)
4 - 45
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
604.
605.
606.
607.
608.
609.
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, A-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, B-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, C-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, U-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, V-axis. (Group 1)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, W-axis. (Group 1)
Format:□□□□.□□□,Unit: mm/min (Default=-9999.999)
Set the software over-travel (OT) limit in the negative (-) direction, the
setting value is equal to the distance from negative OT location to the
machine origin (HOME). Figure below shows the relationship among the
software OT limit, the emergency stop, and the actual hardware limit.
MCM# 610~620 System Reserved!
621.
622.
623.
624.
625.
626.
627.
628.
629.
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, X-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, Y-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, Z-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, A-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, B-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, C-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, U-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, V-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (+) Direction, W-axis. (Group 2)
Format:□□□□□□□,Unit: mm/min (Default=9999.999)
Set the software over-travel (OT) limit in the positive (+) direction, the
setting value is equal to the distance from positive OT location to the
machine origin (HOME).
MCM# 630~640 System Reserved!
641.
642.
643.
644.
645.
646.
647.
648.
649.
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, X-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, Y-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, Z-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, A-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, B-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, C-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, U-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, V-axis. (Group 2)
Software OT Limit in (-) Direction, W-axis. (Group 2)
Format:□□□□.□□□,Unit: mm/min (Default=-9999.999)
Set the software over-travel (OT) limit in the negative (-) direction, the
setting value is equal to the distance from negative OT location to the
machine origin (HOME).
4 - 46
4 MCM Parameters
5~10 mm each
Machine Origin
(Home)
Software OT Limit
(MCM#171~ #182)
Emergency Stop
Actual Hardware Limit
Fig 7.5
MCM# 650~660 System Reserved!
661.
662.
663.
664.
665.
666.
667.
668.
669.
Flag to Clear X-axis Program Coordinate on M02, M30 or M99 Command.
Flag to Clear Y-axis Program Coordinate on M02, M30 or M99 Command.
Flag to Clear Z-axis Program Coordinate on M02, M30, or M99 Command.
Flag to Clear A-axis Program Coordinate on M02, M30, or M99 Command.
Flag to Clear B-axis Program Coordinate on M02, M30, or M99 Command.
Flag to Clear C-axis Program Coordinate on M02, M30, or M99 Command.
Flag to Clear U-axis Program Coordinate on M02, M30, or M99 Command.
Flag to Clear V-axis Program Coordinate on M02, M30, or M99 Command.
Flag to Clear W-axis Program Coordinate on M02, M30, or M99
Command.
Format:□,(Default=0)
Used as flag to clear the coordinate when program execution encounters
M02, M30 or M99 function. The following settings are valid for both X and
Y-axis.
Setting = 0, Flag is OFF, NOT to clear.
Setting = 1, Flag is ON, YES to clear when encountering M02 and M30.
Setting = 2, Flag is ON, YES to clear when encountering M99.
Setting = 3, Flag is ON, YES to clear when encountering M02, M30 and
M99.
MCM# 670~680 System Reserved!
681.
682.
683.
684.
685.
686.
687.
688.
689.
Set Incremental/Absolute Mode, X-axis coordinate.
Set Incremental/Absolute Mode, Y-axis coordinate.
Set Incremental/Absolute Mode, Z-axis coordinate.
Set Incremental/Absolute Mode, A-axis coordinate.
Set Incremental/Absolute Mode, B-axis coordinate.
Set Incremental/Absolute Mode, C-axis coordinate.
Set Incremental/Absolute Mode, U-axis coordinate.
Set Incremental/Absolute Mode, V-axis coordinate.
Set Incremental/Absolute Mode, W-axis coordinate.
4 - 47
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Format:□,(Default=1) for absolute positioning
Ex: Set MCM 681 = 0, X value represents the incremental position and U
value is ineffective.
= 1, X value represents the incremental position and U
value is the incremental position.
*Note 1:
*Note 2:
*Note 3:
*Note 4:
After the parameters are set, execute the command G01
X***,Y***,Z*** F***, the program will perform the axial motions
according to the configured incremental or absolute positions.
H9C: When R209 = 4, the incremental address codes of X,Y,Z
will be U,V,W. However, the A,B,C axes have no
incremental address code, they cannot be used in the
same way as the X,Y,Z axes which allow the conversion
between the incremental positioning and the absolute
positioning. It is necessary to use the G90/G91 modes
to use them.
H9C: X,Y,Z,A,B,C,U,V,W have no incremental address codes,
so they cannot allow the conversion between the
incremental positioning and the absolute positioning. It is
necessary to use the G90/G91 mode to use them.
For H9C using the incremental address codes U,V,W, it is
necessary to set the parameters 1 of the X,Y,Z axes for the
absolution positioning so that the U,V,W commands can be
performed in the program.
If the G90/G91 mode is used for the 9-axis absolute or
incremental positioning change, no matter the parameters are
configured for absolution positioning or for incremental
positioning, the single block X,Y,Z,A,B,C,U,V,W commands will
use the G90/G91 mode for absolute positioning or absolute
increments after the G90/G91 mode is used.
When the controller in H9C is configured to use U,V,W as the
incremental address codes, it will not be influenced by the
G90/G91 mode.
Format of mode appointment:
G90
G91
Absolute coordinate
Incremental coordinate
1. G90 :
When writing G90 in the program, all the axes of X,Y,Z,A,B,C,U,V,W are the
absolute coordinate. All following nodes` axes direction will also feed absolutely.
(See EX1)
The incremental codes U,V,W also can be used in G90 mode. Then X, Y, Z
axes will feed incrementally. But A-axis still feed absolutely. Until it meeting G91
or recycling the program, then the G90 will be over.
EX1: G90 Set Absolute Coordinate
N1 G90
4 - 48
4 MCM Parameters
N2 G1 X20.000 Y15.000
N3 X35.000 Y25.000
N4 X60.000 Y30.000
....
....
....
P0 to P1
P1 to P2
P2 to P3
2. G91 :
When writing G90 in the program, all the axes of X,Y,Z,A,B,C,U,V,W are the
incremental coordinate. All following nodes` axes direction will also feed
incrementally. (See EX2)
In G91 mode, X,Y,Z represent the incremental value. The codes of U, V, W are
not necessary. The axis will move to nowhere.
Until it meeting G90 or recycling the program, then the G91 will be over.
EX2: G91 Set Incremental Coordinate
N1 G91
N2 G1 X20.000 Y15.000
....
N3 X15.000 Y10.000
....
N4 X25.000 Y5.000
....
P0 to P1
P1 to P2
P2 to P3
Y
60
5
P3
35
P2
10
30
25
P1
15
X
20
15
25
Fig 7.6
MCM# 690~700 System Reserved!
701.
702.
703.
704.
705.
706.
707.
708.
709.
X-axis, Position gain.
Y-axis, Position gain.
Z-axis, Position gain.
A-axis, Position gain.
B-axis, Position gain.
C-axis, Position gain.
U-axis, Position gain.
V-axis, Position gain.
W-axis, Position gain.
Format:□□□,(Default=64),Setting Range: 8~640。
Parameters 701~709 are used to set the loop gain. The recommended
value is 64. This setting value is essential to the smooth operation of the
motor. Once it is configured, please do not change it arbitrarily.
4 - 49
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
DC10V
VCMD
N=128/64
N=64/64
N=32/64
2046
4096
Driver output
voltage
1024
SERVO ERROR (ERROR COUNT)
Fig 7-7 Driver output voltage vs. the servo error
The position gain and HUST H9C output voltage command can be
calculated as follows:
Position Gain =
Setting value
64
NC controller output voltage command
= GAIN * Servo feedback error * (
10V
2048
)
The controller in HUST is a closed-loop system. The servo error is the
difference between the controller position command and the actual
feedback value of the servo motor. The controller will adjust the output
voltage of the controller properly according to this difference value. The
setting value of the position gain is related to the stability and the followup of the system servo, so please modify it with care. If:
Servo mismatch > 4096, the ERROR 02 will occur.
In this case, please correct the values of MCM Parameters 701~709 and
then press the “Reset” key. If the problem still exists, please check if the
wire connection of the servo motor is correct.
Adjustment procedure for smooth motor operation: (recommended)
(1) Adjust the servo driver. (Please refer to the operation manual of the
driver)
(2) Adjust the MCM Parameters 461∼469 for the multipliers (1,2,4) of
the signals from the the speed sensors. In normal condition, if the
motor is locked, the Servo Error will be oscillating between 0 and 1;
if it is oscillating between 4 and 5, the problem can be solved
usually by adjusting the MCM Parameters 461 ∼ 469 for the
multipliers, i.e., 4 --> 2, or 2 --> 1.
(3) Adjust the values of MCM Parameters 701~709 for the position
loop gain.
4 - 50
4 MCM Parameters
MCM# 710~720 System Reserved!
721.
722.
723.
724.
725.
726.
727.
728.
729.
Break-over Point (in Error Count) for Position Gain, X-axis.
Break-over Point (in Error Count) for Position Gain, Y-axis.
Break-over Point (in Error Count) for Position Gain, Z-axis.
Break-over Point (in Error Count) for Position Gain, A-axis.
Break-over Point (in Error Count) for Position Gain, B-axis.
Break-over Point (in Error Count) for Position Gain, C-axis.
Break-over Point (in Error Count) for Position Gain, U-axis.
Break-over Point (in Error Count) for Position Gain, V-axis.
Break-over Point (in Error Count) for Position Gain, W-axis.
Format:□□□,(Default=10)
The proper setting of this parameter will assure smooth start-up of servo
motor. When servo error is smaller than the setting value of MCM
#721~#729, the position gain is 64. Otherwise, position gain will be
calculated based on the setting value of MCM #701~ #709 and the setting
values depend on the frictional load on the motor. If the frictional load is
high, setting value is small and vice versa.
Vcmd
GAIN = 128/64
GAIN = 64/64
GAIN = 32/64
0.20
Controller 0.15
Command
0.10
Fig 7.5 Break-over of Position Gain
0.05
ERROR = 10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
ERROR COUNT
70
80
Fig 7.7
MCM# 730~740 System Reserved!
741.
742.
743.
744.
745.
746.
747.
748.
749.
750.
751.
752.
X-axis Denominator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (pulse)
X-axis Numerator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (µm)
Y-axis Denominator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (pulse)
Y-axis Numerator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (µm)
Z-axis Denominator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (pulse)
Z-axis Numerator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (µm)
A-axis Denominator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (pulse)
A-axis Numerator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (µm)
B-axis Denominator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (pulse)
B-axis Numerator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (µm)
C-axis Denominator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (pulse)
C-axis Numerator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (µm)
4 - 51
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
753.
754.
755.
756.
757.
U-axis Denominator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (pulse)
U-axis Numerator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (µm)
V-axis Denominator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (pulse)
V-axis Numerator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (µm)
W-axis Denominator,
MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment.
(pulse)
758. W-axis Numerator, MPG Hand-wheel Resolution Adjustment. (µm)
Format:□□□□,(Default = 100)
Unit:
Denominator = pulses,
Numerator = µm
Ex1: For X-axis, MCM #741 = 100 pulses, MCM #742 = 100 µm.
The resolution for X-axis = 100/100 = 1 µm/pulse.
If MPG hand-wheel moves 1 notch (=100 pulses), the feed length in
X-axis = 100 x (100/100) = 100 µm = 0.1 mm.
Ex2: For Y-axis, MCM #743 = 200 pulses, MCM #744 = 500 µm.
The resolution for Y-axis = 500/200 = 2.5 µm/pulse.
If MPG hand-wheel moves 1 notch (=100 pulses), the feed length in
Y-axis = 100 x (500/200) = 250 µm = 0.25 mm.
MCM# 759~780 System Reserved!
781.
782.
783.
784.
785.
786.
787.
788.
789.
Set if X-axis is rotational axis.
Set if Y-axis is rotational axis.
Set if Z-axis is rotational axis.
Set if A-axis is rotational axis.
Set if B-axis is rotational axis.
Set if C-axis is rotational axis.
Set if U-axis is rotational axis.
Set if V-axis is rotational axis.
Set if W-axis is rotational axis.
Format=□ (Default 0)
Setting= 0 Linear Axis
Setting= 1 Rotational Axis
MCM# 787~800 System Reserved!
801.
802.
803.
804.
805.
806.
807.
808.
809.
The distance of S bit sent before the X-axis reaches in position. (S176)
The distance of S bit sent before the Y-axis reaches in position. (S177)
The distance of S bit sent before the Z-axis reaches in position. (S178)
The distance of S bit sent before the A-axis reaches in position. (S179)
The distance of S bit sent before the B-axis reaches in position. (S180)
The distance of S bit sent before the C-axis reaches in position. (S181)
The distance of S bit sent before the U-axis reaches in position. (S182)
The distance of S bit sent before the V-axis reaches in position. (S183)
The distance of S bit sent before the W-axis reaches in position. (S184)
Format=□□□□.□□□ (Default= 0.000)
Unit: mm
4 - 52
4 MCM Parameters
For example: MCM 801 =10.00mm
Giving the command: When G01 U30.000 F1000, when the X-axis move
20.000mm and 10.000mm away from the final value, the sysem will
send S176=ON。
MCM# 807~820 System Reserved!
821.
822.
823.
824.
825.
826.
827.
828.
829.
The accelerate/decelerate time of X-axis.
The accelerate/decelerate time of Y-axis.
The accelerate/decelerate time of Z-axis.
The accelerate/decelerate time of A-axis.
The accelerate/decelerate time of B-axis.
The accelerate/decelerate time of C-axis.
The accelerate/decelerate time of U-axis.
The accelerate/decelerate time of V-axis.
The accelerate/decelerate time of W-axis.
Format=□□□□ (Default 0), Unit (msec)
Acceleration/Deceleration Time (4~3072)
MCM# 830~840 System Reserved!
The pitch error compensation of the guide screw in HUST H6C-M is relative to
the mechanical origin as the base point.
841.
842.
843.
844.
845.
846.
847.
848.
849.
Pitch Error Compensation Mode Setting, X-axis.
Pitch Error Compensation Mode Setting, Y-axis.
Pitch Error Compensation Mode Setting, Z-axis.
Pitch Error Compensation Mode Setting, A-axis.
Pitch Error Compensation Mode Setting, B-axis.
Pitch Error Compensation Mode Setting, C-axis.
Pitch Error Compensation Mode Setting, U-axis.
Pitch Error Compensation Mode Setting, V-axis.
Pitch Error Compensation Mode Setting, W-axis.
Format:□ , Default=0
Setting = 0, Compensation canceled.
Setting = -1, Negative side of compensation.
Setting = 1, Positive side of compensation.
X-axis Y-axis Z-axis A-axis B-axis C-axis U-axis V-axis W-axis
Explanation
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Compensation cancel
Do compensation when tool is on
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
the (-) side of the reference point
Do compensation when tool is on
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
the (+) side of the reference
point.
Ex:
MCM # 841= -1
4 - 53
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
The pitch error in the X-axis will not be compensated when the tool travels to the
positive side of the X-HOME location. It will be compensated when the tool
travels to the negative side of machine origin.
MCM # 841= 1
The pitch error in the X-axis will be compensated when the tool travels to the
positive side of Y-HOME location. No compensation will be done when it travels
to the negative side of machine origin.
Coordinate -100.000
Coordinate 100.000
MCM 841 = -1
Negative
compensation
Machine HOME
Coordinate 0
MCM 841 = 1
Positive
compensation
Fig 7.9
MCM#850 System Reserved!
851.
852.
853.
854.
855.
856.
Segment Length for Pitch Error Compensation, X-axis.
Segment Length for Pitch Error Compensation, Y-axis.
Segment Length for Pitch Error Compensation, Z-axis.
Segment Length for Pitch Error Compensation, A-axis.
Segment Length for Pitch Error Compensation, B-axis.
Segment Length for Pitch Error Compensation, C-axis.
Format=□.□□□, Default=0, Unit=mm
Axis
X
Y
Z
A
B
C
Corresponding MCM# for
Segment Length
MCM# 861 ~ 940
MCM# 941 ~ 1020
MCM# 1021 ~ 1100
MCM# 1101 ~ 1180
MCM# 1181 ~ 1260
MCM# 1261 ~ 1340
Segment Length
20 ~ 480 mm
20 ~ 480 mm
20 ~ 480 mm
20 ~ 480 mm
20 ~ 480 mm
20 ~ 480 mm
Max. Number of
Segment
80
80
80
80
80
80
1. Segment length is the total length of ball-screw divided by the number
of segment.
1000 mm
Fig7.10
100mm
Ex:
If you want to divide the ball-screw on X-axis, which is 1 meter in
length,
into
10
segments,
the
segment
length
is
1000.00/10=100.00mm. This 100.00 mm will be stored in MCM#
4 - 54
4 MCM Parameters
851.(Each compensation of them is set by MCM#861~#940)
2. If the average segment length is less than 20 mm, use 20 mm.
3. When doing compensation, HUST H6C-M controller will further divide
each segment into 8 sections. The amount of compensation for each
section is equal to the whole number, in µm, of 1/8 of the amount in
MCM #861~#940. The remainder will be added to the next section.
Ex:
Segment length =100.00mm and the amount of compensation is
0.026mm as set in MCM#861. Then, the compensation for each section
is 0.026/8=0.00325mm. The compensation for this segment will be done
in a manner as tabulated below:
Section Tool Position
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12.5
25
37.5
50
62.5
75
87.5
100
Avg. comp. For each
section
0.00325
0.00325
0.00325
0.00325
0.00325
0.00325
0.00325
0.00325
Actual comp. At
each section
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.004
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.004
Accumulated
compensation
0.003
0.006
0.009
0.013
0.016
0.019
0.022
0.026
MCM# 857~860 System Reserved!
861~1340. Amount of Compensation for each segment(X.Y.Z.A.B.C-axis) is 80.
The Compensation value is in incremental mode. If the number of segment is
less than 80, please fill the uncompensated segments with zero to avoid any
potential errors.
Ex:
If the segment of compensation is 10, the amount of the compensation from
Seg.11 to 40 ( X-axis MCM#861~940, Y-axis MCM#941~1020, Z-axis
MCM#1021~1100, A-axis MCM #1101~1180, B-axis MCM#1181~1260, C-axis
MCM#1261~1340 ) must be set as zero.
MCM#861~940 Pitch error compensation of each segment, X-axis.
MCM#941~1020 Pitch error compensation of each segment, Y-axis.
MCM#1021~1100Pitch error compensation of each segment, Z-axis.
MCM#1101~1180Pitch error compensation of each segment, A-axis.
MCM#1181~1260Pitch error compensation of each segment, B-axis.
MCM#1261~1340Pitch error compensation of each segment, C-axis.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: mm (Default=0.000)
1341.
1342.
1343.
1344.
Tool#1, Radius Offset Data.
X-axis Offset Data, Tool#1.
Y-axis Offset Data, Tool#1.
Z-axis Offset Data, Tool#1.
4 - 55
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
1345.
A-axis Offset Data, Tool#1.
1346.
B-axis Offset Data, Tool#1.
1347.
C-axis Offset Data, Tool#1.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: mm (Default=0.000)
1348.
Tool#2, Radius offset data.
1349.
X-axis offset data, Tool#2.
1350.
Y-axis offset data, Tool#2.
1351.
Z-axis offset data, Tool#2.
1352.
A-axis offset data, Tool#2.
1353.
B-axis offset data, Tool#2.
1354.
C-axis offset data, Tool#2.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: mm (Default=0.000)
MCM#1355~1620:Tool#3~40, Radius offset data and X/Y/Z/A/B/C-axis offset
data。
1621.
Tool #1 radius wear compensation.
1622.
X-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation.
1623.
Y-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation.
1624.
Z-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation.
1625.
A-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation.
1626.
B-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation.
1627.
C-axis, Tool #1 wear compensation.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: mm (Default=0.000)
1628.
Tool #2 radius wear compensation.
1629.
X-axis, Tool #2 wear compensation.
1630.
Y-axis, Tool #2 wear compensation.
1631.
Z-axis, Tool #2 wear compensation.
1632.
A-axis, Tool #2 wear compensation.
1633.
B-axis, Tool #2 wear compensation.
1634.
C-axis, Tool #2 wear compensation.
Format:□.□□□,Unit: mm (Default=0.000)
MCM#1635~1900:Tool#3~40, Radius wear compensation and X/Y/Z/A/B/Caxis wear compensation。
1901~1940:Tool-tip radius compensation(Tool-tip#1~40)
4 - 56
5 Connections
5
Connections
5.1
Connections Configuration
H6C-M Controller connections schematic
DAC-2 Output(DB15LM Pin 2)
G31 Input(DB15LM Pin 5)
DAC-1 Output(DB15LM Pin 1)
ADC-2 Input(DB15LM Pin 7)
ADC-1 Input(DB15LM Pin 6)
MPG1
Handwheel 1
MPG2
Handwheel 2
24in/16out
X
AC Servo
Y
AC Servo
Z
AC Servo
A
AC Servo
B
AC Servo
C
AC Servo
#1 I/O Module
(48IN/32OUT)
Relay
Board
AC Power
Supply
Optional: Use in
combination as required
24in/16out
DC Power Supply
Can be connected with a second I/O module, max. up to 6 modules. Set I/O start position
by Jumper on the module.
※ When used with Axial control module, 32IN/32OUT positions are used as well.
5-1
Fig.5-1
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
5.2
System installation
5.2.1
Operating Environment
H6C-M Serial Controllers must be used in the following surroundings; anomaly
may occur if the specified range is exceeded.
*
Temperature of surroundings
- 0°C to 45°C.
Operation
Storage or transfer - -20°C to 55°C.
*
Rate of temperature variation
*
Relative Humidity
- < 80% RH
Normal
Short period - Max. 95% RH
*
Vibration limits
-0.075 mm max. at 5 HZ
In operation
*
Noise
- Max. voltage pulse in 0.01 S
In operation
2000 V/0.1×10-6 S
*
Other
Please consult our company for operations with a high amount of dust,
cutting fluid or organic solvent.
5.2.2
- Max. 1.1°C/min
Notes on the Control Unit Case Design
*
The controller and auxiliary panels shall be of a totally enclosed type to
prevent dust ingression.
*
The internal temperature shall not exceed the surrounding temperature by
more than 10°C.
*
Cable entries shall be sealed.
*
To prevent noise inference, a net clearance of 100mm shall be kept
between the cables of each unit, AC power supply and CRT. If magnetic
fields exist, a net clearance of 300mm shall be kept.
*
Refer to Server Operation Manual for the installation of servo driver.
5.2.3
Thermal Design of Cabinet
The internal temperature shall not exceed the surrounding temperature by more
than 10°C. The main considerations for designing the cabin are the heat source
and the heat dissipation area. For the controller, the customer is usually unable
5-2
5 Connections
to control the heat source, however the heat dissipation area is a key factor to
be considered. The internal temperature rise can be estimated using the
following equations:
2
(1) With a cooling fan, the permissible temperature rise shall be 1°C/6W/1m .
(2) Without a cooling fan, the permissible temperature rise shall be
2
1°C/4W/1m .
The equations indicate that for a cabinet having a heat dissipation area of 1m2
and a 6W heat source and a cooling fan (or 4W heat source without cooling
fan), the internal temperature rise shall be 1°C. The heat dissipation area is the
total surface area of the cabin minus the area in contact with the ground
surface.
Ex.1:(with cooling fan)
heat dissipation area=2 m2
internal permissible temperature rise=10°C
therefore the max. permissible heat source in the cabin is=6W×2×10=
120W.
If heat source within the cabin exceeds 120W, a cooling fin or other heat
dissipation device must be provided.
Ex.2:(without cooling fan)
heat dissipation area=2 m2
internal permissible temperature rise=10°C
therefore the max. permissible heat source in the cabin is=4W×2×10=
80W
If heat source within the cabin exceeds 80W, a cooling fin or other heat
dissipation device must be provided.
5-3
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
5.2.4
*
H6C-M Extermal Dimensions
H6C-M The Controller Panel
Fig.5-2 Panel of H6C-M Controller
*
H6C-M Auxiliary Panel
Fig.5-3 H6C-M Auxiliary Panel
5-4
5 Connections
*
H6C-M Cabinet Dimensions and Rear View port
Fig.5-4 H6C-M Cabinet Dimensions and Rear View port
*
H6C-M Control Unit Case Dimensions (Top View)
Fig.5-5 H6C-M Control Unit Case Dimensions (Top View)
5-5
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
*
H6C-M Auxiliary Panel, dimensions
Fig.5-6 H6C-M Auxiliary Panel, dimensions
*
H6C-M Cutout Dimensions
Fig.5-7 H6C-M Cutout Dimensions
5-6
5 Connections
*
H6C-M Auxiliary panel Cutout Dimensions
Fig.5-8 H6C-M Auxiliary panel Cutout Dimensions
5-7
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
5.2.5
*
H9C-M Extermal Dimensions
H9C-M The Controller Panel
Fig.5-9 Panel of H6C-M Controller
*
H9C-M Auxiliary Panel
Fig. 5-10 H9C-M Auxiliary Panel
5-8
5 Connections
*
H9C-M Cabinet Dimensions and Rear View port
Fig. 5-11 H9C-M Cabinet Dimensions and Rear View port
*
H9C-M Control Unit Case Dimensions (Top View)
Dimensions refer to: Fig.5-5 H6C-M Control Unit Case Dimensions (Top View)
*
H9C-M Auxiliary Panel, dimensions
Dimensions refer to: Fig.5-6 H6C-M Auxiliary Panel, dimensions
*
H9C-M Cutout Dimensions
Dimensions refer to: Fig.5-7 H6C-M Cutout Dimensions
*
H9C-M Auxiliary panel Cutout Dimensions
Dimensions refer to: Fig.5-8 H6C-M Auxiliary panel Cutout Dimensions
5-9
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
5.2.6
*
H6CL-M Dimensions
H6CL-M The Controller Panel
Fig.5-12 Panel of H6C-M Controller
*
H6CL-M Auxiliary Panel
Fig.5-13 H6CL-M Auxiliary Panel
5 - 10
5 Connections
*
H6CL-M Cabinet Dimensions and Rear View port
Fig. 5-14 H6CL-M Cabinet Dimensions and Rear View port
*
H6CL-M Control Unit Case Dimensions (Top View)
Fig.5-15 H6CL-M Control Unit Case Dimensions (Top View)
5 - 11
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
*
H6CL-M Auxiliary Panel, dimensions
Fig.5-16 H6CL-M Auxiliary Panel, dimensions
*
H6CL-M Cutout Dimensions
Fig.5-17 H6CL-M Cutout Dimensions
5 - 12
5 Connections
*
H6CL-M A Auxiliary panel Cutout Dimensions
Fig.5-18 H6CL-M Auxiliary panel Cutout Dimensions
5 - 13
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
5.2.7
*
H9CL-M Dimensions
H9CL-M The Controller Panel
Fig.5-19 Panel of H6C-M Controller
*
H9CL-M Auxiliary Panel
Fig.5-20 H9CL-M Auxiliary Panel
5 - 14
5 Connections
*
H9CL-M Cabinet Dimensions and Rear View port
Fig.5-21 H9CL-M Cabinet Dimensions and Rear View port
*
H9CL-M Control Unit Case Dimensions (Top View)
Dimensions refer to: Fig.5-15 H6CL-M Control Unit Case Dimensions (Top View)
*
H9CL-M Auxiliary Panel, dimensions
Dimensions refer to: Fig.5-16 H6CL-M Auxiliary Panel, dimensions.
*
H9CL-M Cutout Dimensions
Dimensions refer to: Fig.5-17 H6CL-M Cutout Dimensions
*
H9CL-M Auxiliary panel Cutout Dimensions
Dimensions refer to: Fig.5-18 H6CL-M Auxiliary panel Cutout Dimensions
5 - 15
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
5.3
Connector Type
HUST H6C Series Controller rear panel connectors:
DBxx : xx indicates number of pins
DB9L : 9-pin connector
DB9LF : a terminal with a female 9-pin connector
DB15LM: a terminal with a male 15-pin connector
5.4 Connector name
Connector types of the controller are as follows:
Table 5-1 Names and types of connectors
Rear of controller
Connector Name
Analog Input/Output
X-axis servo
Y-axis servo
Z-axis servo
A-axis servo
B-axis servo
C-axis servo
H6C
H9C
Connector
Name
●
●
AD/DA
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
U-axis servo
●
V-axis servo
W-axis servo
Manual pulse generator
(MPG)
Standard I/O
●
●
●
●
●
X-AXIS
Y-AXIS
Z-AXIS
A-AXIS
B-AXIS
C-AXIS
U-AXIS
V-AXIS
W-AXIS
MPG
SIO
Connector Type
DB15LM (male)
DB15LF
(female)
DB15LF
(female)
DB15LF
(female)
DB15LF
(female)
DB15LF
(female)
DB15LF
(female)
DB15LF
(female)
DB15LF
(female)
DB15LF
(female)
DB9LM (male)
DB15LF
(female)
Controller Front
Connector Name
Communication
Interface
H6C
H6C
Connector
Name
●
●
RS232
●
●
5 - 16
USB
Connector Type
DB9LF (female)
Standard
USB(female)
5 Connections
5.5
Connector Pin-out Definition
Table 5-2 HUST H6C-M Series Connector Pin Assignment
HUST H6C-M
AD/DA
AXIS
MPG
DB15LM
Definition
DB15LM
Definition
DB9LF
Definition
(male)
(male)
(female)
1
DAC0
1
CW+
1
A
2
DAC1
2
CW2
B
3
D+
3
CCW+
3
5V
4
D4
CCW4
A
5
G31 IN
5
VCC
5
B
6
ADC-0
6
GRD-(Z-)
6
7
ADC-1
7
TOG
7
0V
8
8
VCOM
8
0V
9
9
SVO+
9
10
10
SVO11
11
A12
5V
12
A+
13
+12V
13
B+
14
-12V
14
B15
GND
15
GND
5.5.1
DA/AD Analog Input/Output
HUST H6C Series DA/AD Pin Assignment:
DA/AD
CPU
Main
Board
DAC-0
DAC-1
D+
DG31 IN
ADC-0
ADC-1
1
2 set DAC 0 ~ 10V output
2
3
4
5
G31 IN: Hardware stop signal
6
7
8
9
2 set ADC IN 0 ~ 10V input
10
11
12
VCC
+12V
-12V
GND-CN
13
14
0V
15
Fig.5-22 DA/AD control wiring
5 - 17
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
5.5.2
DA/AD Control Signals
Table 5-3
DA/AD: Setting of relative registers
Function Register
Description
R146
Pin 1 (DAC-0) and Pin 15 (GND) are for #1 output signal
DAC
R147
Pin 2 (DAC-1) and Pin 15 (GND) are for #2 output signal
Usage
1. PLC directly sets R146=5000
2. Actual output voltage=5V
R142
Indicates value of #1 analog voltage input
ADC
R143
Indicates value of #2 analog voltage input
Wiring Method
Note:
VR
Value read from #1 ADC IN will be
shown in R142
5.5.3
Pin 13 +12V
Pin 06 ADC IN
Pin 15 GND
G31 INPUT Control Signals
Table 5-4
G31 INPUT: Settings for related Parameters and Registers
Description
Pin 5 (G31 IN) inputs signal to control high-speed axial stop,
G31 INPUT
responding in 0.5µsec.
Setting of high-speed stop in axial direction of G31 Jump
Function
Setting method
Parameter
BIT0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 respectively represents X/Y/Z/A/B/C/U/V/W
530
axis.
Ex.: BIT0=1, indicates X-axis Function enabled; BIT1=1,
indicates Y-axis Function enabled
Signal format for waiting for the G31skip Function
Setting = 0, I-bit Input signal is an ascending (0→1) trigger
signal
R250
Setting = 1, I-bit Input signal is a descending (1→0) trigger
signal
Setting = 2, I-bit Input signal is a Normal Open (0) signal
Setting = 3, I-bit Input signal is a Normal Close (1) signal
5 - 18
5 Connections
5.5.4
Axial Control, pin assignment and wiring
Connect servo driver to axial-control connector as shown in Fig.5-23 (pin
assignment identical for all axes).
Servo connections dependent on
different maker
AXIS
CPU
Main
Board
CW+
CWCCW+
CCWVCC-CN
GRD-(Z-)
TOG
VCOM
SVO+
SVOAA+
B+
BGND-CN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Displacement command -10 ~ +10V
Servo
signal
SERVO ON(internal control)
12
13
14
15
0V
Cabin GND
Fig.5-23 Wiring for Axial Control
SERVO ON connection:
VCC
SVO+
SVO
SVO-
Max. Voltage 60V
Respond time 4ms
Fig.5-24 SERVO ON Connection
¾
¾
¾
Isolated twist-pair cables shall be used.
Pay special attention to Pins 11-14 of the axial connection. In case the
motor runs scattering, alter the terminal A with the terminal A- at the driver
end.
HUST miller controller, when voltage-command type servo motor is used,
you need to set the Follow Error checking function. (Not applicable to pulse
commands.)
(a) Parameter 533 = 4096 Æ check the value of Follow Error.
(b) Parameter 543 =511 Æ check Follow Error of the axis
X/Y/Z/A/B/C/U/V/W simultaneously (set by BIT: Bit0=1 for X-axis,
Bit1=1 for Y-axis……).
(c) When the ERROR COUNT of the actual feedback of X-axis motor
>4096, the system will issue an error message.
5 - 19
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
5.5.5
¾
¾
¾
¾
Wiring of Manual Pulse Generator (MPG)
HUST H6C Series can be provided with 2 manual pulse generators.
If the direction of tool travel is not the same as indicated by the MPG, use
Parameter 518, handwheel direction, to correct it.
If C237=1 in the PLC, MPG2 terminals can be used.
When MPG2 is used, adjust the multiplier using R245.
CPU Main
Board
1
MPG
+5V 0V A B
MPG
+5V 0V A B
2
3
4
5
6
P7
0V 7
0V
8
Fig.5-25 Wiring of Manual Pulse Generator (MPG)
5 - 20
5 Connections
5.5.6
Wiring of Spindle Control
There are 2 types of Spindle Control:
(a) Voltage Command type
(b) Pulse Command type
* Voltage Command type
Spindle
VCOM
GND-CN
5V
AA+
B+
BZ-
8
15
5
11
12
13
14
Servo
driver
6
Cabin GND
Fig.5-26 Spindle voltage command control-closed circuit wiring (servo)
Spindle
VCOM
GND-CN
5V
AA+
B+
BZ-
Variable
frequency
8
15
5
11
12
13
14
External
encoder
6
Cabin GND
Fig.5-26-1 Spindle Voltage Command Control- Open circuit wiring (Variable
frequency)
* Pulse Command Type
Spindle
CW+
CWCCW+
CCWAA+
B+
BZ-
1
2
3
4
Servo
driver
11
12
13
14
6
Cabin GND
Fig.5-27 Spindle pulse command control- closed circuit wiring (servo)
5 - 21
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Spindle
CW+
CWCCW+
CCWAA+
B+
BZ5V
GND-CN
1
2
Variable
Frequency
3
4
11
12
13
External
Encoder
14
6
5
15
Cabin GND
Fig.5-27-1 Spindle pulse command control- closed circuit wiring (variable
frequency)
5 - 22
5 Connections
5.5.7
SIO Input/Output wiring schematic (see Fig.5-28)
24VPower
24V Power
40 pin bracket wiring #1, standard I/O board
interface
I0~I23 (24 IN), O0~O15 (16 OUT)
40 pin bracket wiring #2, standard I/O board
interface
I24~I47 (24 IN), O16~O31 (16 OUT)
LE
LE
LED
LE
FROM-
TO-NEXT
24V GND
24V Power input
HUST H6C
15 pin male/female cable connection
15 pin male/female cable
connection
10 pin white connector, can be connected to
3 optional boards: RELAY PCB, AC Power
PCB, DC Power PCB
Relay PCB
AC Power PCB
DC Power PCB
Fig.5-28
5 - 23
HUST CNC H6C-M Wiring Manual
* SIO Control Module (PCB No.: H6C\SIO\148032\V2-\V2_4)
I24~131
O24~O3
1
I8~15
O8~O1
5
1
4
O0~O7
3
O16~O2
3
I0~I7
5
I32~39
2
I40~47
I16~I23
6
7
Fig.5-29
Note:
1. (1) is #1 40PIN Bracket Connector: I0~I23 INPUT, O0~O15 OUTPUT.
2. (2) is #2 40PIN Bracket Connector: I24~I47 INPUT, O16~O31 OUTPUT.
3. (3) is INPUT LED indicator, I0~23 on the left and I24~47 on the right, as
shown in the figure.
4. (4) is OUTPUT LED indicator, O0~O15 on the left and O16~31 on the right,
as shown in the figure.
5. (5) is DIP switch of IO start positions of the module, defined as follows:
ON
DIP
1
3
2
4
SW
Table 5-5
Module
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
Switch 4
Range of I
Range of O
#1
0
0
0
0
I000 ~ I047
O000 ~ O031
#2
1
1
0
0
I048 ~ I095
O048 ~ O079
#3
0
1
1
0
I096 ~ I143
O096 ~ O127
I144 ~ I191
O144 ~ O175
#4
6.
7.
H6C-M, H9C-M Auxiliary Panels
#5
0
0
1
1
I192 ~ I239
O192 ~ O223
#6
1
1
1
1
I240 ~ I255
O240 ~ O255
(6) is INPUT format JUMP (NPN OR PNP) for I0~I23.
(7) is INPUT format JUMP (NPN OR PNP) for I24~I47
EX:
Short
I0~I23 are of NPN type
Short
I0~I23 are of PNP type
5 - 24
Fig.5-30
5 Connections
* IO adapter board (PCB no.: H6C\SIO\CONNECT \V1_1)
Fig.5-31
Note:
1. I/O adapter board controls 24 input terminals and 16 output terminals.
2. Output control is by 0V output.
3. An INPUT can be of NPN type or PNP type.
4. When the SIO setting of the module is PNP, the 8 input terminals after the
INPUT signal are of PNP type; the rest are of NPN type.
5. Input voltage at I: 0V
6. Output current at I: 6mA
7. Output current at O: 100mA
Wiring example:
Ext. Relay
Spark Killer
24V
NPN type
When O0 is
ON, 24V GND
will activate the
RELAY
PNP
SENSOR
Fig.5-32
5 - 25
NPN Type
When the key is pressed,
terminals I23 and GND are
connected; the signal is
enabled.
Button
PNP Type
When PNP signal is enabled, the +24V
input at I18 is connected with GND to
form a circuit, the signal is enabled.
HUST CNC H6C-M Wiring Manual
* NPN OUTPUT RELAY adapter board (H6C\SIO\RLY8\V0)
Fig.5-33
Wiring example:
When O08 signal is activated,
relay on the RELAY PCB will
be excited, energizing the
AC110 power supply
AC11
Note:
1. Max. current for each output of the PCB is 1A
2. The 8 Output terminals can sustain a max. current of 8A, all together.
3. For a max. current > 1A, use other relays.
4. Contacts on the RELAY adaptor board are dry contacts.
5 - 26
Fig.5-34
5 Connections
* AC Power supply SSR adaptor board (H6C\SIO\SSR8\V0)
Fig.5-35
Wiring Example:
When O0 activates,
110V voltage will be
supplied.
AC IN
AC110
AC220
DC24VI
N
AC110
Fig.5-36
Note:
1. AC Power supply adaptor board controls 8 AC110 outputs.
2. Max. current for each output of the PCB is 1A .
3. The 8 Output terminals can sustain a max. current of 8A, all together.
4. Two power supply ports are provided on the AC Power supply adaptor
board:
(1) AC 110V ~220V;
(2) DC 24V (can be connected independently from the external)
5. Rating of the factory supplied fuse is 5A.
5 - 27
HUST CNC H6C-M Wiring Manual
* DC Power Adapter Board (H6C\SIO\DC8\V1)
Fig.5-37
Wiring Example:
When O0
activates, 110V
voltage will be
supplied.
Fig.5-38
DC24V 輸出
Note:
1. DC power output board controls 8 sets of DC 24V output.
2. Max. current for each output of the PCB is 1A .
3. The 8 Output terminals can sustain a max. current of 8A, all together.
4. Rating of the factory supplied fuse is 5A.
5 - 28
5 Connections
5.5.8
Wiring of System AC Power Supply
CNC Power/ SERVO Power ON-OFF sequence diagram
CNC Power-on
Servo Power-on
Power off delay
Time
Time
Fig.5-39
servo on delay
In order to avoid controller anomalies caused by voltage fluctuations, it is
recommended to provide sequential differences for the ON/OFF of the
CNC power and Servo power.
1. SERVO ON signal shall be activated in a slight delay after the activation of
system power supply, when the latter is stabilized.
2. Before switching off the system power supply, provide a delay for switching
off the SERVO ON signal first.
To CPU Power supply R
AC220V R
AC220V S
To CPU Power supply T
AC220V T
Timer Delay Contact
power-off
Servo
Driver
power-on
Power-On Relay
Power-On Timer Relay
Component within the
dotted-line frame can be
omitted
Fan
AC 220V R T0 Servo AMP Power TB P
AC 220V S T0 Servo AMP Power TB N
R
S T
Fig.5-40 Wiring of System AC Power Supply
5 - 29
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
5.5.9
RS232 Connector Pin Assignment and Connection
Fig.4-41 shows the connection between the HUST H6C Serial Controller and
the computer (PC). When carrying out the wiring, take the following precautions:
1.
The RS232C cable shall not exceed a length of 15m.
2.
In case of existence of massive noise generators (e.g., EDM processor,
welding machine, etc.) in the vicinity, Twist-pair type cables shall be used,
or such an environment shall be avoided. The controller and the PC shall
NOT share a common power socket with an EDM or welding machine.
3.
Make sure the voltage of the interface at the PC end is within the range of
10~15V.
DC
DC
HUST controller end
DB9LM
CONNECTOR
PC end COM1
2
TXD
3
RXD
SG
2
RXD
3
TXD
5
5
7
CTS
8
RTS
SG
DB9LF
CONNECTOR
7
RTS
8
CTS
Fig.5-41 RS232C connection
5 - 30
5 Connections
5.6
*
Wiring Examples
Emergency-Stop wiring diagram-1
Recommended wiring diagram. In this connection, the software control and
hardware control are connected in a series; when the E-stop button is pressed,
the hardware will switch off Servo-On even if the software fails.
24V GND (0V)
(E-Stop)
button
Limit switch
Forced Reset pushbutton
X-axis origin LIMIT
Z-axis origin LIMIT
24V GND (0V)
SIO Module
I24/O16 PCB
Servo drive
Servo-On
Signal
X-axis
8 OUT RELAY PCBs
Servo activation command
24V
Servo drive
Servo-On
Signal
Z-axis
Fig.5-42
External SERVO ON RELAY
5 - 31
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
*
Emergency-Stop circuit diagram-2
Simplified wiring diagram
24V GND (0V)
(E-Stop)
pushbutton
Limit switch
Forced Reset pushbutton
X-axis origin LIMIT
Z-axis origin LIMIT
24V GND (0V)
SIO Module
I24/O16 PCB
Servo drive
Servo-On
Signal
X-axis
Servo drive
Servo-On
Signal
Z-axis
8 OUT
PCBs
Fig.5-43
5 - 32
RELAY
6 Errot Messages
6
Error Messages
When an error occurs in the execution of an HUST H6C series controller, an
error message will appear in the LCD screen as shown in Fig.10-1. Possible
error messages regarding the HUST H6C series controller, together with their
remedies, are described as follows.
Program No.:
0 Program note:
Program Coordinates: 0.000
0.000
0.000
Machine Coordinates: 0.000
0.000
0.000
0
0
0
0
0
0
G00 MPO:
G01 MPO:
SSO:
M:
T:
S:
100%
100%
100%
0
0
0
Error
Message
Origin-Stop
Error 02. Y AXIS ERR
X
Error
Code
01
Y
Z
X&Y&
Fig.6-1
Details
Causes
B
Incorrect MCM parameter setting.
Each axis returned to origin, GRID limit of the servo
motor >1024.
Remedy:
Auto
MDI
1. Check MCM parameter for correct setting or double-press
to enter
"MDI" mode, execute commend G10 P1000 to delete parameter, then reset parameter.
2. If the controller has rested for more than a year without switching on, the
internal memory will disappear. The controller will display [BT1] indicating
the battery power is low and you need to contact the dealer.
Error
Code
02
Details
X~C
S
Causes
Excessive error in Axial Follow.
Excessive error in Spindle Follow (>3072).
Remedy:
1. Check the program for excessive setting of F value;
2. Check whether the Resolution setting is correct (Check items 241~ 252,
MCM parameters);
3. Check if machine or motor is obstructed. Check the wiring.
4. Check Parameter 533; the default value is 4096.
6-1
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Error
Code
03
Details
L
Causes
M99 count exceeds maximum limit
(#10922>#10921).
Message:
Setting of the M02, M30, or M99 counter exceeds the limit of system variables,
10921.
Remedy:
1. Double press “0” button in AUTO mode to clear the counting value.
2. Clear the system variable count of 10922 so it returns to 0, then press
RESET
to remove the error.
3. Or run G10 P201 command in AUTO or MDI mode, for clearing the system
variable (10921) to 0, then press
Error
Code
04
RESET
Details
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
again to clear the error.
Causes
U USB/SDC error —FR_DISK_ERR
USB/SDC error —FR_INT_ERR
USB/SDC error —FR_NOT_READY
USB/SDC error —FR_NO_FILE
USB/SDC error —FR_NO_PATH
USB/SDC error —FR_INVALID_NAME
USB/SDC error —FR_DENIED
USB/SDC error —FR_EXIST
USB/SDC error —FR_INVALID_OBJECT
USB/SDC error —FR_WRITE_PROTECTED
USB/SDC error —FR_INVALID_DRIVE
USB/SDC error —FR_NOT_ENABLED
USB/SDC error —FR_NO_FILESYSTEM
USB/SDC error —FR_MKFS_ABORTED
USB/SDC error —FR_TIMEOUT
Remedy:
1. Make sure the USB is of FAT format and the file extension of the
transferred program is correct.
2. Consult the dealer or the manufacturer.
6-2
6 Errot Messages
Error
Code
08
Details
Causes
D
Incorrect Data Address retrieved when executing
ZDNC.
MDI command error (commend size greater than
128bytes).
Size of current program segment exceeds 128bytes.
M
E
Remedy:
Check the program and make sure that each segment is within 128 characters.
Error
Code
10
Details
O
P
F
B
N
Causes
RS232 error —OVERRUN ERROR
RS232 error —PARITY ERROR
RS232 error —FRAME ERROR
RS232 error —BREAK ERROR
RS232 error —OTHER ERROR
Remedy:
1. Check transmission speed of controller communication port, i.e., parameter
520 of MCM is the same value as that of PC or man-machine interface.
2. Check the communication cables between the controller and the PC or the
man-machine interface.
Error
Code
11
Details
1
A
D
F
U
Causes
CHECKSUM error of program
SUM error in the Start-up check
Program Memory address error (DOWN MODE)
Program Memory is full
Program Memory address error (UP MODE)
Remedy:
Auto
MDI
Double-press
button to enter MDI mode. Run G10 P2001 command to
clear all the program data, check the memory battery. If the controller displays
battery low (BT1) message, you need to replace the battery (data in the
memory will be lost if the controller remains OFF for more than one year).
6-3
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Error
Code
12
Details
N
L
P
Causes
The size of the burn-in program exceeds the limit
H4 Series:56k
H6 Standard: 56k= 896 lines, 64bytes per line
H6 Turning/Milling: 56k +128k (saving capacity for
function key) =2944 lines. Since the current limit for
burn-in is 128k, therefore the maximum size is 128k
(=2048 lines).
The declared command exceeds 20 program lines
(G11, G12, G04, M-code).
L error in “G10 P0920 Lxxxx”
(L shall not be empty, and 0<=LA<1000)
Program specified by Lxxxx in “G10 P0921 Lxxxx”
has not been declared.
Remedy:
1.
Check the program for incorrect writing.
2.
Check the capacity for the program.
Error
Code
13
Details
G
T
M
R
Causes
G error code.
During the G87 command, neither of R209 BIT10
and 11 is ON.
T error code.
M error code (MA<0).
An R error in commands G81~G89.
(1) R and Z(A) have different symbols.
(2) R and [Z(A)-R] have different symbols.
Remedy:
1.
Check the program and make sure the G-code setting is correct
2.
Check if the PLC is set to support the G-command.
Error
Code
14
Details
X.
..
..
C
Causes
X, Y, Z, A, B, or C-axis Hard limit (OT) .
Remedy:
Manually move the axis into its working range.
6-4
6 Errot Messages
Error
Code
15
Details
Causes
L
Servo motor returns to Origin to find GRID signal, the
distance exceeds the setting range of the parameter.
Remedy:
1.
Make sure that values set for parameters 401∼406 are greater than the
distance made by one revolution of the servo motor.
Ex.:
Distance of one revolution of the X-axis servo motor = 5.000mm, then
MCM401 = 5.200
2.
Check the CPU for correct wiring.
Error
Code
18
Details
C
M
T
Q
L
P
Causes
There have some error in programming occurs when
executing the program in AUTO mode.
Error of copied segment in the program; cause for the
error may be one of the following:
1. Non-existence of the source program.
2. Starting line-no. > Ending line-no. in the source
program
3. Starting line-no. > total line-number of the source
program
4. Ending line-no. > total line-number of the source
program
5. Missing program number in the pasting target.
6. Starting line-no. of the pasting target > total linenumber.
7. Memory is full when the pasting content has not
been fully pasted.
8. Source program = pasting target program no.;
and, starting line of source program <= starting
line no. of pasting target <= ending line no. of
source program.
Trigger C25 segment data retrieval error: cannot find
initial address of specified segment.
Failure in finding initial address of specified program.
M95Qxxx error (QA is out of 0∼127, or QA specified
program does not exist).
M99 jump-back program error (G10P301 specified
line-no. error).
Empty CALL in sub-program. (G60…G63)
Remedy:
1. Check the ending of the program and add M02 or M03 segment.
2. Check the program for excessive size.
3. Check for any error in the segment content and in serial setting (N) of the
specified segment.
6-5
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Error
Code
20
Details
Causes
X
..
..
.
C
X, Y, Z, A, B, C- axis software OT limit.
N
Number of position limits set in the dynamic range of
the software exceeds 4000.
Remedy:
Check the program or re-set MCM parameters 581~586 and 601~606, the
software travel limits.
Error
Details
Causes
Code
22
Emergency Stop (C002=1).
Remedy:
After removal of error, turn off the Emergency Stop pushbutton, followed by
pressing the RESET button.
Error
Details
Code
24
Memory Stack error.
Remedy:
Check for repetitive use of CALL subroutine.
Error
Code
25
Details
R
L
G
Causes
Causes
G02/G03 command error (Radius of starting point
unequal to radius of ending point).
Incorrect input format of R in G02/G03
No displacement in both axes of arc interpolation, or
(R<0 in lathe mode).
2*[RAR]>[LENGTH].
I, J, R not specified in G02/G03 command.
Remedy:
Check the program. Re-calculate arc intersection and verify its coordinates.
6-6
6 Errot Messages
Error
Code
27
Details
Causes
X.
..
C
For X~C, when C28=1 and R190 ≠ 0, R190 < the
deceleration distance of respective axis after the
motor receives the INPUT of G31.
Remedy:
1. Check if R190 setting is too short so that it is less than the acceleration
distance.
2. Shorten the acceleration/ deceleration time setting (Motor load to be
considered).
Error
Code
28
Details
Causes
N
W
MISSING G70 WITH G7x COMMAND.
[ZA] DIR. SHOULD BE DIFFERENT FROM
[G70WA].
[XA] DIR. SHOULD BE DIFFERENT FROM [G70UA].
U
Remedy:
Check for any error in the cutting cycle command of the lathe.
Error
Code
29
Details
G
P
A
R
C
Causes
The G code that includes C, R, or A segment is not
G00..G04.
Incorrect parameter setting.
Incorrect setting of A_ or its relative parameter.
Incorrect setting of R_ or its relative parameter.
Incorrect setting of C_ or its relative parameter
Remedy:
Check if the relative parameter setting is incorrect.
Error
Details
Code
31
Missing PLC.
Remedy:
1. Upload the PLC.
2. Consult the dealer or the manufacturer.
6-7
Causes
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Error
Code
32
Details
E
P
L
D
C
Causes
E in G92 is not within the (1.0∼100.0) range
(imperial unit).
P in G76 is not within the (30∼90) range.
End of cutting – preset length < max. cutting depth.
G76 (max. cutting depth) < 0.
CANPX-CANPR< CHAMX
Threading length < threading tool withdraw length.
Remedy:
Check for any error in the cyclic tapping command of the lathe.
Error
Code
33
Details
4
5
6
7
Causes
Kxx<0 in G34.
Kxx<0 in G35.
Kxx<0 in G36.
Pxx<=0 or Kxx<0 in G37.
Execute G35, G36, or G37 in lathe mode.
Remedy:
Check for any error in K setting in commands G34~37 of the lathe.
Error
Code
36
Details
B
C
F
L
P
R
S
T
W
Causes
Header of USB/SDC file is not ‘O8001’.
Header of USB/SDC file is not ‘O8002’.
Header of MCM file is not ‘O9002’.
Header of function key file is not ‘O9140’.
Header of variable file is not ‘O9004’.
Header of PLC file is not ‘O9003’.
Size of PLC document exceeds upper limit.
Input program no. exceeds 1000 (Oxxxx).
LENGTH OR SUM ERROR
#13245, #13246, #13247, #13248.
Header of SYS file is not ‘O9100’.
Size of SYS document exceeds upper limit.
Header of TBL file is not ‘O9110’.
Input hex file is not in XXXX,0DH format.
Remedy:
Check for incorrect data transfer format.
6-8
6 Errot Messages
Error
Details
Causes
Code
37
NC ALARM (C007=1).
Remedy:
Check external control device, remove error and RESET.
Error
Details
Causes
Code
38
Excessive screen display time (>3000ms).
Remedy:
1.
Re-transfer screen data file.
2.
Consult dealer or manufacturer.
Error
Code
41
42
43
45
46
48
49
Details
Causes
In Tool Offset mode, the command paths between 2
single blocks are 2 parallel lines.
OVER CUT
Insufficient distance between Start and End (<0.005).
C251=0, Between the single block that the radius of
circular arc compensation < 0
In Tool Offset mode, the system fails to determine the
center-of-arc when executing an arc command.
Radius of tool offset < 0.
Direction of tool tip in the lathe is not of the 0~9 type
Number of segment of axial displacement is greater
than 10
Remedy:
1.
Check for any error in tool offset value.
2.
Check the program for any error.
Error
Details
Causes
Code
50
..
Customer-defined error alarm using G65.
.
99
Remedy:
Check for any error in the setting of G65, customer-defined error message.
6-9
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
6 - 10
7 Appendix A - I/O
7
Appendix A – I/O
* Input Planning
INPUT
I00
I01
I02
I03
I04
I05
I06
I07
I08
I09
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
I17
I18
I19
I20
I21
I22
I23
I24
I25
I26
I27
I28
I29
I30
I31
I32
I33
I34
Description
Remarks
EM-STOP
X-axis HOME LIMIT
Y-axis HOME LIMIT
Z-axis HOME LIMIT
A-axis HOME LIMIT
B-axis HOME LIMIT
C-axis HOME LIMIT
U-axis HOME LIMIT
V-axis HOME LIMIT
Program start
Editting mode limit
IN Position Angle
Unclamp key
X OT +
X OTY OT +
Y OTZ OT +
Z OTA OT +
A OTB OT +
B OTC OT +
C OTU OT +
U OTV OT +
V OTX SERVO READY
Y SERVO READY
Z SERVO READY
A SERVO READY
B SERVO READY
C SERVO READY
NC
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
* NC or NO MCM SET
* NC or NO MCM SET
* NC or NO MCM SET
NO
NO
NO
NO
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
* NC or NO MCM SET
* NC or NO MCM SET
* NC or NO MCM SET
* NC or NO MCM SET
* NC or NO MCM SET
* NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
* NC or NO MCM SET
7-1
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
INPUT
I35
I36
I37
I38
I39
I40
I41
I42
I43
I44
I45
I46
I47
※
Description
U SERVO READY
V SERVO READY
SPINDLE SERVO READY
MPG X
MPG Y
MPG Z
MPG A
MPG B
MPG C
MPG U
MPG V
MPG *10
MPG *100
Remarks
* NC or NO MCM SET
* NC or NO MCM SET
NC or NO MCM SET
*
*
*
* H9C-M Planning
7-2
7 Appendix A - I/O
* Output planning
OUTPUT
Description
O00
Spindle rotation CW
O01
Spindle rotation CCW
O02
Cool
O03
Unclamp
O04
O05
Lubricant
O06
Red light
O07
Yellow light
O08
Green light
O09
IN Position angle
O10
O11 X SERVO ON
O12 Y SERVO ON
O13 Z SERVO ON
O14 A SERVO ON
O15 B SERVO ON
O16 C SERVO ON
O17 U SERVO ON
O18 V SERVO ON
O19
O20
O21
O22
O23
O24
O25
O26
O27
O28
O29
O30
O31
※ * H9C-M Planning
7-3
Remarks
*
*
*
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
* M-code and I/O
M code
M03
M04
M05
M08
M09
M10
M11
Descrption
Spindle rotation CW
Spindle rotation CCW
Spindle stop
Coolant on
Coolant off
Lubricant on
Lubricanti off
I/O
Remarks
O00=1
O01=1
O00=0,O01=0
O02=1
O02=0
O05=1
O05=0
* Other
Occupied portion in the PLC Plan
1. Variables 1-1000。
2. Registers 20, 90 and subsequent
3. A_BIT 0∼400; do not use when planning
4. If the inverter spindle was analog output (0∼10V)control and must used the
outside signal for the spindle position that the spindle I/O connection is
above-mentioned list:
7-4
8 Appendix B – zDNC and USB Device Operation
8
Appendix B – Zdnc Simultaneously Transfer/Execution and USB
Device Operation
8.1
Using USB Device in H6C-M
1.
Enter the File Transmission Mode
Fig. 8-1
Function Keys for File Transmission:
‹ USB-D for setting the transmission mode to the USB communication.
‹ USB-H for reading the flash drive at the SUB port.
‹ RS232 for setting the transmission mode to the RS232 communication.
(Default at Startup)
2.
Plug the USB Flash Drive
USB port for
flash drive
RS232 port
Fig, 8-2
8-1
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
3.
After pressing the function key USB-H for reading the data in the flash
drive, the file transmission operation screen is displayed.
Free capacity of
the flash drive
DIR represents
folder
Folder name
or file name
Used capacity of
the flash drive
File creation
date and time
File size
Fig. 8-3
Function Keys:
Delete: Delete a folder or a file.
Copy: Copy a file. (It only performs the copy operation.)
Paste: Paste the file to be copied into another folder or directory.
Upload: Transfer the data in the controller into the flash drive.
Download: Transfer the data in the flash drive into the controller.
Enter: Open a folder.
Back to Upper Lever: Go back to the upper level.
Return: Exit the USB operation mode and go back to the transmission
mode.
8-2
8 Appendix B – zDNC and USB Device Operation
4.
Upload (Save) Screen
Fig. 8-4
5.
Download (Read) Screen
Fig. 8-5
8-3
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
Ì
Filename extension in the USB flash drive: If the filename extension is
incorrect, it will not be read correctly.
Machining Program
Î.NCD
MCM Parameters
Î.MCM
PLC
Î.PLC
Screen Layout
Î.TBL
System
Î.SYS
Variables
Î.VAR
“Save machining program” Î
“Save parameters”
Î
“Save variables”
Î
“Read machining program” Î
“Read parameters”
Î
“Transfer and execute”
Î
“Read all programs”
Î
“Read the parameters”
Î
“Read PLC”
Î
“Read screen layout”
Î
“Read system”
Î
“Read variables”
Î
Save the program from the controller into the
USB device.
Save the parameters from the controller into the
USB device.
Save the variables from the controller into the
USB device.
Read the machining program from the USB
device into the controller.
Read the machining program from the USB
device into the controller.
Read the machining program from the USB
device into the controller and execute the
program simultaneously.
Read all the machining programs from the USB
device into the controller.
Read the parameters from the USB device into
the controller.
Read the PLC files from the USB device into the
controller.
Read the screen layout file from the USB device
into the controller.
Read the system file from the USB device into
the controller.
Read the variable files from the USB device into
the controller.
To read the data, please move the cursor to the file to be read and then
press the corresponding key.
To save the data, please enter the filename first and then press the
corresponding key to save the data with the entered filename.
8-4
8 Appendix B – zDNC and USB Device Operation
8.2
ZDNC Operation
When executed the DNC function from PC that move the cursor to the files then
press the DNC key to run this program.
1.
Getting Started
Click
on the desktop to execute zDNC
zDNC
2.
Open the Option Setting Screen
Enable Option is
required for
parameter
configuration
Right-click
Fig 8-6
8-5
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
3.
Display Settings
Corresponding
to controller
settings
To avoid
connection
failure, do not
check boxes
other than
those indicated
here.
Save the changes
To change the settings, press
DisConnect. When the settings are
configured, press Connect.
Fig 8-7
8-6
8 Appendix B – zDNC and USB Device Operation
4.
PC TO CNC
Job file path
Trans. progress
Start trans
Select a file
0: Transmit the part program to CNC
1:Transmit the part program to CNC and execute simultaneously (PLC required)
2: Transmit variables to CNC
Fig 8-8
8-7
HUST CNC H6C-M Manual
5.
CNC TO PC
Start reading
Select a file name
0>transmit the current file
1>transmit all part programs
2-9&M>transmit variables
FIG 8-9
4. Attention
※ DNC function is required to transmit huge part programs.
※ PLC should not restrict the availability of R100, R239, C04 when DNC is
required, because the system needs to change the value of these three items
to enter DNC mode.
※ For DNC operation, settings are only required at the ZDNC (computer) end
rather than the controller end, if PLC does not give any restrictions.
8-8

Benzer belgeler